s3

package module
Version: v1.26.10 Latest Latest
Warning

This package is not in the latest version of its module.

Go to latest
Published: May 17, 2022 License: Apache-2.0 Imports: 46 Imported by: 551

Documentation

Overview

Package s3 provides the API client, operations, and parameter types for Amazon Simple Storage Service.

Index

Constants

View Source
const ServiceAPIVersion = "2006-03-01"
View Source
const ServiceID = "S3"

Variables

This section is empty.

Functions

func GetHostIDMetadata added in v0.31.0

func GetHostIDMetadata(metadata middleware.Metadata) (string, bool)

GetHostIDMetadata retrieves the host id from middleware metadata returns host id as string along with a boolean indicating presence of hostId on middleware metadata.

func NewDefaultEndpointResolver

func NewDefaultEndpointResolver() *internalendpoints.Resolver

NewDefaultEndpointResolver constructs a new service endpoint resolver

func WithAPIOptions added in v1.0.0

func WithAPIOptions(optFns ...func(*middleware.Stack) error) func(*Options)

WithAPIOptions returns a functional option for setting the Client's APIOptions option.

func WithEndpointResolver

func WithEndpointResolver(v EndpointResolver) func(*Options)

WithEndpointResolver returns a functional option for setting the Client's EndpointResolver option.

func WithPresignClientFromClientOptions added in v0.30.0

func WithPresignClientFromClientOptions(optFns ...func(*Options)) func(*PresignOptions)

WithPresignClientFromClientOptions is a helper utility to retrieve a function that takes PresignOption as input

func WithPresignExpires added in v0.30.0

func WithPresignExpires(dur time.Duration) func(*PresignOptions)

WithPresignExpires is a helper utility to append Expires value on presign options optional function

Types

type AbortMultipartUploadInput

type AbortMultipartUploadInput struct {

	// The bucket name to which the upload was taking place. When using this action
	// with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The
	// access point hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts,
	// you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
	// hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using
	// this action with S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you
	// provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more
	// information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/S3onOutposts.html) in the
	// Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// Key of the object for which the multipart upload was initiated.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Key *string

	// Upload ID that identifies the multipart upload.
	//
	// This member is required.
	UploadId *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// Confirms that the requester knows that they will be charged for the request.
	// Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests. For information
	// about downloading objects from Requester Pays buckets, see Downloading Objects
	// in Requester Pays Buckets
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ObjectsinRequesterPaysBuckets.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	RequestPayer types.RequestPayer
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type AbortMultipartUploadOutput

type AbortMultipartUploadOutput struct {

	// If present, indicates that the requester was successfully charged for the
	// request.
	RequestCharged types.RequestCharged

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type BucketExistsWaiter added in v0.31.0

type BucketExistsWaiter struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

BucketExistsWaiter defines the waiters for BucketExists

func NewBucketExistsWaiter added in v0.31.0

func NewBucketExistsWaiter(client HeadBucketAPIClient, optFns ...func(*BucketExistsWaiterOptions)) *BucketExistsWaiter

NewBucketExistsWaiter constructs a BucketExistsWaiter.

func (*BucketExistsWaiter) Wait added in v0.31.0

func (w *BucketExistsWaiter) Wait(ctx context.Context, params *HeadBucketInput, maxWaitDur time.Duration, optFns ...func(*BucketExistsWaiterOptions)) error

Wait calls the waiter function for BucketExists waiter. The maxWaitDur is the maximum wait duration the waiter will wait. The maxWaitDur is required and must be greater than zero.

func (*BucketExistsWaiter) WaitForOutput added in v1.19.0

func (w *BucketExistsWaiter) WaitForOutput(ctx context.Context, params *HeadBucketInput, maxWaitDur time.Duration, optFns ...func(*BucketExistsWaiterOptions)) (*HeadBucketOutput, error)

WaitForOutput calls the waiter function for BucketExists waiter and returns the output of the successful operation. The maxWaitDur is the maximum wait duration the waiter will wait. The maxWaitDur is required and must be greater than zero.

type BucketExistsWaiterOptions added in v0.31.0

type BucketExistsWaiterOptions struct {

	// Set of options to modify how an operation is invoked. These apply to all
	// operations invoked for this client. Use functional options on operation call to
	// modify this list for per operation behavior.
	APIOptions []func(*middleware.Stack) error

	// MinDelay is the minimum amount of time to delay between retries. If unset,
	// BucketExistsWaiter will use default minimum delay of 5 seconds. Note that
	// MinDelay must resolve to a value lesser than or equal to the MaxDelay.
	MinDelay time.Duration

	// MaxDelay is the maximum amount of time to delay between retries. If unset or set
	// to zero, BucketExistsWaiter will use default max delay of 120 seconds. Note that
	// MaxDelay must resolve to value greater than or equal to the MinDelay.
	MaxDelay time.Duration

	// LogWaitAttempts is used to enable logging for waiter retry attempts
	LogWaitAttempts bool

	// Retryable is function that can be used to override the service defined
	// waiter-behavior based on operation output, or returned error. This function is
	// used by the waiter to decide if a state is retryable or a terminal state. By
	// default service-modeled logic will populate this option. This option can thus be
	// used to define a custom waiter state with fall-back to service-modeled waiter
	// state mutators.The function returns an error in case of a failure state. In case
	// of retry state, this function returns a bool value of true and nil error, while
	// in case of success it returns a bool value of false and nil error.
	Retryable func(context.Context, *HeadBucketInput, *HeadBucketOutput, error) (bool, error)
}

BucketExistsWaiterOptions are waiter options for BucketExistsWaiter

type BucketNotExistsWaiter added in v1.0.0

type BucketNotExistsWaiter struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

BucketNotExistsWaiter defines the waiters for BucketNotExists

func NewBucketNotExistsWaiter added in v1.0.0

func NewBucketNotExistsWaiter(client HeadBucketAPIClient, optFns ...func(*BucketNotExistsWaiterOptions)) *BucketNotExistsWaiter

NewBucketNotExistsWaiter constructs a BucketNotExistsWaiter.

func (*BucketNotExistsWaiter) Wait added in v1.0.0

func (w *BucketNotExistsWaiter) Wait(ctx context.Context, params *HeadBucketInput, maxWaitDur time.Duration, optFns ...func(*BucketNotExistsWaiterOptions)) error

Wait calls the waiter function for BucketNotExists waiter. The maxWaitDur is the maximum wait duration the waiter will wait. The maxWaitDur is required and must be greater than zero.

func (*BucketNotExistsWaiter) WaitForOutput added in v1.19.0

func (w *BucketNotExistsWaiter) WaitForOutput(ctx context.Context, params *HeadBucketInput, maxWaitDur time.Duration, optFns ...func(*BucketNotExistsWaiterOptions)) (*HeadBucketOutput, error)

WaitForOutput calls the waiter function for BucketNotExists waiter and returns the output of the successful operation. The maxWaitDur is the maximum wait duration the waiter will wait. The maxWaitDur is required and must be greater than zero.

type BucketNotExistsWaiterOptions added in v1.0.0

type BucketNotExistsWaiterOptions struct {

	// Set of options to modify how an operation is invoked. These apply to all
	// operations invoked for this client. Use functional options on operation call to
	// modify this list for per operation behavior.
	APIOptions []func(*middleware.Stack) error

	// MinDelay is the minimum amount of time to delay between retries. If unset,
	// BucketNotExistsWaiter will use default minimum delay of 5 seconds. Note that
	// MinDelay must resolve to a value lesser than or equal to the MaxDelay.
	MinDelay time.Duration

	// MaxDelay is the maximum amount of time to delay between retries. If unset or set
	// to zero, BucketNotExistsWaiter will use default max delay of 120 seconds. Note
	// that MaxDelay must resolve to value greater than or equal to the MinDelay.
	MaxDelay time.Duration

	// LogWaitAttempts is used to enable logging for waiter retry attempts
	LogWaitAttempts bool

	// Retryable is function that can be used to override the service defined
	// waiter-behavior based on operation output, or returned error. This function is
	// used by the waiter to decide if a state is retryable or a terminal state. By
	// default service-modeled logic will populate this option. This option can thus be
	// used to define a custom waiter state with fall-back to service-modeled waiter
	// state mutators.The function returns an error in case of a failure state. In case
	// of retry state, this function returns a bool value of true and nil error, while
	// in case of success it returns a bool value of false and nil error.
	Retryable func(context.Context, *HeadBucketInput, *HeadBucketOutput, error) (bool, error)
}

BucketNotExistsWaiterOptions are waiter options for BucketNotExistsWaiter

type ChecksumValidationMetadata added in v1.25.0

type ChecksumValidationMetadata struct {
	// AlgorithmsUsed is the set of the checksum algorithms used to validate the
	// response payload. The response payload must be completely read in order for the
	// checksum validation to be performed. An error is returned by the operation
	// output's response io.ReadCloser if the computed checksums are invalid.
	AlgorithmsUsed []string
}

ChecksumValidationMetadata contains metadata such as the checksum algorithm used for data integrity validation.

func GetChecksumValidationMetadata added in v1.25.0

func GetChecksumValidationMetadata(m middleware.Metadata) (ChecksumValidationMetadata, bool)

GetChecksumValidationMetadata returns the set of algorithms that will be used to validate the response payload with. The response payload must be completely read in order for the checksum validation to be performed. An error is returned by the operation output's response io.ReadCloser if the computed checksums are invalid. Returns false if no checksum algorithm used metadata was found.

type Client

type Client struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Client provides the API client to make operations call for Amazon Simple Storage Service.

func New

func New(options Options, optFns ...func(*Options)) *Client

New returns an initialized Client based on the functional options. Provide additional functional options to further configure the behavior of the client, such as changing the client's endpoint or adding custom middleware behavior.

func NewFromConfig

func NewFromConfig(cfg aws.Config, optFns ...func(*Options)) *Client

NewFromConfig returns a new client from the provided config.

func (*Client) AbortMultipartUpload

func (c *Client) AbortMultipartUpload(ctx context.Context, params *AbortMultipartUploadInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*AbortMultipartUploadOutput, error)

This action aborts a multipart upload. After a multipart upload is aborted, no additional parts can be uploaded using that upload ID. The storage consumed by any previously uploaded parts will be freed. However, if any part uploads are currently in progress, those part uploads might or might not succeed. As a result, it might be necessary to abort a given multipart upload multiple times in order to completely free all storage consumed by all parts. To verify that all parts have been removed, so you don't get charged for the part storage, you should call the ListParts (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListParts.html) action and ensure that the parts list is empty. For information about permissions required to use the multipart upload, see Multipart Upload and Permissions (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/mpuAndPermissions.html). The following operations are related to AbortMultipartUpload:

* CreateMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateMultipartUpload.html)

* UploadPart (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_UploadPart.html)

* CompleteMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CompleteMultipartUpload.html)

* ListParts (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListParts.html)

* ListMultipartUploads (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListMultipartUploads.html)

func (*Client) CompleteMultipartUpload

func (c *Client) CompleteMultipartUpload(ctx context.Context, params *CompleteMultipartUploadInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*CompleteMultipartUploadOutput, error)

Completes a multipart upload by assembling previously uploaded parts. You first initiate the multipart upload and then upload all parts using the UploadPart (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_UploadPart.html) operation. After successfully uploading all relevant parts of an upload, you call this action to complete the upload. Upon receiving this request, Amazon S3 concatenates all the parts in ascending order by part number to create a new object. In the Complete Multipart Upload request, you must provide the parts list. You must ensure that the parts list is complete. This action concatenates the parts that you provide in the list. For each part in the list, you must provide the part number and the ETag value, returned after that part was uploaded. Processing of a Complete Multipart Upload request could take several minutes to complete. After Amazon S3 begins processing the request, it sends an HTTP response header that specifies a 200 OK response. While processing is in progress, Amazon S3 periodically sends white space characters to keep the connection from timing out. Because a request could fail after the initial 200 OK response has been sent, it is important that you check the response body to determine whether the request succeeded. Note that if CompleteMultipartUpload fails, applications should be prepared to retry the failed requests. For more information, see Amazon S3 Error Best Practices (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ErrorBestPractices.html). You cannot use Content-Type: application/x-www-form-urlencoded with Complete Multipart Upload requests. Also, if you do not provide a Content-Type header, CompleteMultipartUpload returns a 200 OK response. For more information about multipart uploads, see Uploading Objects Using Multipart Upload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/uploadobjusingmpu.html). For information about permissions required to use the multipart upload API, see Multipart Upload and Permissions (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/mpuAndPermissions.html). CompleteMultipartUpload has the following special errors:

* Error code: EntityTooSmall

* Description: Your proposed upload is smaller than the minimum allowed object size. Each part must be at least 5 MB in size, except the last part.

* 400 Bad Request

* Error code: InvalidPart

* Description: One or more of the specified parts could not be found. The part might not have been uploaded, or the specified entity tag might not have matched the part's entity tag.

* 400 Bad Request

* Error code: InvalidPartOrder

* Description: The list of parts was not in ascending order. The parts list must be specified in order by part number.

* 400 Bad Request

* Error code: NoSuchUpload

* Description: The specified multipart upload does not exist. The upload ID might be invalid, or the multipart upload might have been aborted or completed.

* 404 Not Found

The following operations are related to CompleteMultipartUpload:

* CreateMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateMultipartUpload.html)

* UploadPart (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_UploadPart.html)

* AbortMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_AbortMultipartUpload.html)

* ListParts (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListParts.html)

* ListMultipartUploads (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListMultipartUploads.html)

func (*Client) CopyObject

func (c *Client) CopyObject(ctx context.Context, params *CopyObjectInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*CopyObjectOutput, error)

Creates a copy of an object that is already stored in Amazon S3. You can store individual objects of up to 5 TB in Amazon S3. You create a copy of your object up to 5 GB in size in a single atomic action using this API. However, to copy an object greater than 5 GB, you must use the multipart upload Upload Part - Copy (UploadPartCopy) API. For more information, see Copy Object Using the REST Multipart Upload API (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/CopyingObjctsUsingRESTMPUapi.html). All copy requests must be authenticated. Additionally, you must have read access to the source object and write access to the destination bucket. For more information, see REST Authentication (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/RESTAuthentication.html). Both the Region that you want to copy the object from and the Region that you want to copy the object to must be enabled for your account. A copy request might return an error when Amazon S3 receives the copy request or while Amazon S3 is copying the files. If the error occurs before the copy action starts, you receive a standard Amazon S3 error. If the error occurs during the copy operation, the error response is embedded in the 200 OK response. This means that a 200 OK response can contain either a success or an error. Design your application to parse the contents of the response and handle it appropriately. If the copy is successful, you receive a response with information about the copied object. If the request is an HTTP 1.1 request, the response is chunk encoded. If it were not, it would not contain the content-length, and you would need to read the entire body. The copy request charge is based on the storage class and Region that you specify for the destination object. For pricing information, see Amazon S3 pricing (http://aws.amazon.com/s3/pricing/). Amazon S3 transfer acceleration does not support cross-Region copies. If you request a cross-Region copy using a transfer acceleration endpoint, you get a 400 Bad Request error. For more information, see Transfer Acceleration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/transfer-acceleration.html). Metadata When copying an object, you can preserve all metadata (default) or specify new metadata. However, the ACL is not preserved and is set to private for the user making the request. To override the default ACL setting, specify a new ACL when generating a copy request. For more information, see Using ACLs (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/S3_ACLs_UsingACLs.html). To specify whether you want the object metadata copied from the source object or replaced with metadata provided in the request, you can optionally add the x-amz-metadata-directive header. When you grant permissions, you can use the s3:x-amz-metadata-directive condition key to enforce certain metadata behavior when objects are uploaded. For more information, see Specifying Conditions in a Policy (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/amazon-s3-policy-keys.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For a complete list of Amazon S3-specific condition keys, see Actions, Resources, and Condition Keys for Amazon S3 (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/list_amazons3.html). x-amz-copy-source-if Headers To only copy an object under certain conditions, such as whether the Etag matches or whether the object was modified before or after a specified date, use the following request parameters:

* x-amz-copy-source-if-match

* x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match

* x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since

* x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since

If both the x-amz-copy-source-if-match and x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since headers are present in the request and evaluate as follows, Amazon S3 returns 200 OK and copies the data:

* x-amz-copy-source-if-match condition evaluates to true

* x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since condition evaluates to false

If both the x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match and x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since headers are present in the request and evaluate as follows, Amazon S3 returns the 412 Precondition Failed response code:

* x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match condition evaluates to false

* x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since condition evaluates to true

All headers with the x-amz- prefix, including x-amz-copy-source, must be signed. Server-side encryption When you perform a CopyObject operation, you can optionally use the appropriate encryption-related headers to encrypt the object using server-side encryption with Amazon Web Services managed encryption keys (SSE-S3 or SSE-KMS) or a customer-provided encryption key. With server-side encryption, Amazon S3 encrypts your data as it writes it to disks in its data centers and decrypts the data when you access it. For more information about server-side encryption, see Using Server-Side Encryption (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/serv-side-encryption.html). If a target object uses SSE-KMS, you can enable an S3 Bucket Key for the object. For more information, see Amazon S3 Bucket Keys (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/bucket-key.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access Control List (ACL)-Specific Request Headers When copying an object, you can optionally use headers to grant ACL-based permissions. By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access control. When adding a new object, you can grant permissions to individual Amazon Web Services accounts or to predefined groups defined by Amazon S3. These permissions are then added to the ACL on the object. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html) and Managing ACLs Using the REST API (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-using-rest-api.html). If the bucket that you're copying objects to uses the bucket owner enforced setting for S3 Object Ownership, ACLs are disabled and no longer affect permissions. Buckets that use this setting only accept PUT requests that don't specify an ACL or PUT requests that specify bucket owner full control ACLs, such as the bucket-owner-full-control canned ACL or an equivalent form of this ACL expressed in the XML format. For more information, see Controlling ownership of objects and disabling ACLs (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/about-object-ownership.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. If your bucket uses the bucket owner enforced setting for Object Ownership, all objects written to the bucket by any account will be owned by the bucket owner. Checksums When copying an object, if it has a checksum, that checksum will be copied to the new object by default. When you copy the object over, you may optionally specify a different checksum algorithm to use with the x-amz-checksum-algorithm header. Storage Class Options You can use the CopyObject action to change the storage class of an object that is already stored in Amazon S3 using the StorageClass parameter. For more information, see Storage Classes (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/storage-class-intro.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Versioning By default, x-amz-copy-source identifies the current version of an object to copy. If the current version is a delete marker, Amazon S3 behaves as if the object was deleted. To copy a different version, use the versionId subresource. If you enable versioning on the target bucket, Amazon S3 generates a unique version ID for the object being copied. This version ID is different from the version ID of the source object. Amazon S3 returns the version ID of the copied object in the x-amz-version-id response header in the response. If you do not enable versioning or suspend it on the target bucket, the version ID that Amazon S3 generates is always null. If the source object's storage class is GLACIER, you must restore a copy of this object before you can use it as a source object for the copy operation. For more information, see RestoreObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_RestoreObject.html). The following operations are related to CopyObject:

* PutObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutObject.html)

* GetObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObject.html)

For more information, see Copying Objects (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/CopyingObjectsExamples.html).

func (*Client) CreateBucket

func (c *Client) CreateBucket(ctx context.Context, params *CreateBucketInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*CreateBucketOutput, error)

Creates a new S3 bucket. To create a bucket, you must register with Amazon S3 and have a valid Amazon Web Services Access Key ID to authenticate requests. Anonymous requests are never allowed to create buckets. By creating the bucket, you become the bucket owner. Not every string is an acceptable bucket name. For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Bucket naming rules (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/bucketnamingrules.html). If you want to create an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket, see Create Bucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_control_CreateBucket.html). By default, the bucket is created in the US East (N. Virginia) Region. You can optionally specify a Region in the request body. You might choose a Region to optimize latency, minimize costs, or address regulatory requirements. For example, if you reside in Europe, you will probably find it advantageous to create buckets in the Europe (Ireland) Region. For more information, see Accessing a bucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/UsingBucket.html#access-bucket-intro). If you send your create bucket request to the s3.amazonaws.com endpoint, the request goes to the us-east-1 Region. Accordingly, the signature calculations in Signature Version 4 must use us-east-1 as the Region, even if the location constraint in the request specifies another Region where the bucket is to be created. If you create a bucket in a Region other than US East (N. Virginia), your application must be able to handle 307 redirect. For more information, see Virtual hosting of buckets (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/VirtualHosting.html). Access control lists (ACLs) When creating a bucket using this operation, you can optionally configure the bucket ACL to specify the accounts or groups that should be granted specific permissions on the bucket. If your CreateBucket request sets bucket owner enforced for S3 Object Ownership and specifies a bucket ACL that provides access to an external Amazon Web Services account, your request fails with a 400 error and returns the InvalidBucketAclWithObjectOwnership error code. For more information, see Controlling object ownership (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/about-object-ownership.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. There are two ways to grant the appropriate permissions using the request headers.

* Specify a canned ACL using the x-amz-acl request header. Amazon S3 supports a set of predefined ACLs, known as canned ACLs. Each canned ACL has a predefined set of grantees and permissions. For more information, see Canned ACL (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html#CannedACL).

* Specify access permissions explicitly using the x-amz-grant-read, x-amz-grant-write, x-amz-grant-read-acp, x-amz-grant-write-acp, and x-amz-grant-full-control headers. These headers map to the set of permissions Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access control list (ACL) overview (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/acl-overview.html). You specify each grantee as a type=value pair, where the type is one of the following:

* id – if the value specified is the canonical user ID of an Amazon Web Services account

* uri – if you are granting permissions to a predefined group

* emailAddress – if the value specified is the email address of an Amazon Web Services account Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:

* US East (N. Virginia)

* US West (N. California)

* US West (Oregon)

* Asia Pacific (Singapore)

* Asia Pacific (Sydney)

* Asia Pacific (Tokyo)

* Europe (Ireland)

* South America (São Paulo)

For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/general/latest/gr/rande.html#s3_region) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.

For example, the following x-amz-grant-read header grants the Amazon Web Services accounts identified by account IDs permissions to read object data and its metadata: x-amz-grant-read: id="11112222333", id="444455556666"

You can use either a canned ACL or specify access permissions explicitly. You cannot do both. Permissions In addition to s3:CreateBucket, the following permissions are required when your CreateBucket includes specific headers:

* ACLs - If your CreateBucket request specifies ACL permissions and the ACL is public-read, public-read-write, authenticated-read, or if you specify access permissions explicitly through any other ACL, both s3:CreateBucket and s3:PutBucketAcl permissions are needed. If the ACL the CreateBucket request is private or doesn't specify any ACLs, only s3:CreateBucket permission is needed.

* Object Lock - If ObjectLockEnabledForBucket is set to true in your CreateBucket request, s3:PutBucketObjectLockConfiguration and s3:PutBucketVersioning permissions are required.

* S3 Object Ownership - If your CreateBucket request includes the the x-amz-object-ownership header, s3:PutBucketOwnershipControls permission is required.

The following operations are related to CreateBucket:

* PutObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutObject.html)

* DeleteBucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucket.html)

func (*Client) CreateMultipartUpload

func (c *Client) CreateMultipartUpload(ctx context.Context, params *CreateMultipartUploadInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*CreateMultipartUploadOutput, error)

This action initiates a multipart upload and returns an upload ID. This upload ID is used to associate all of the parts in the specific multipart upload. You specify this upload ID in each of your subsequent upload part requests (see UploadPart (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_UploadPart.html)). You also include this upload ID in the final request to either complete or abort the multipart upload request. For more information about multipart uploads, see Multipart Upload Overview (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/mpuoverview.html). If you have configured a lifecycle rule to abort incomplete multipart uploads, the upload must complete within the number of days specified in the bucket lifecycle configuration. Otherwise, the incomplete multipart upload becomes eligible for an abort action and Amazon S3 aborts the multipart upload. For more information, see Aborting Incomplete Multipart Uploads Using a Bucket Lifecycle Policy (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/mpuoverview.html#mpu-abort-incomplete-mpu-lifecycle-config). For information about the permissions required to use the multipart upload API, see Multipart Upload and Permissions (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/mpuAndPermissions.html). For request signing, multipart upload is just a series of regular requests. You initiate a multipart upload, send one or more requests to upload parts, and then complete the multipart upload process. You sign each request individually. There is nothing special about signing multipart upload requests. For more information about signing, see Authenticating Requests (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/sig-v4-authenticating-requests.html). After you initiate a multipart upload and upload one or more parts, to stop being charged for storing the uploaded parts, you must either complete or abort the multipart upload. Amazon S3 frees up the space used to store the parts and stop charging you for storing them only after you either complete or abort a multipart upload. You can optionally request server-side encryption. For server-side encryption, Amazon S3 encrypts your data as it writes it to disks in its data centers and decrypts it when you access it. You can provide your own encryption key, or use Amazon Web Services KMS keys or Amazon S3-managed encryption keys. If you choose to provide your own encryption key, the request headers you provide in UploadPart (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_UploadPart.html) and UploadPartCopy (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_UploadPartCopy.html) requests must match the headers you used in the request to initiate the upload by using CreateMultipartUpload. To perform a multipart upload with encryption using an Amazon Web Services KMS key, the requester must have permission to the kms:Decrypt and kms:GenerateDataKey* actions on the key. These permissions are required because Amazon S3 must decrypt and read data from the encrypted file parts before it completes the multipart upload. For more information, see Multipart upload API and permissions (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/mpuoverview.html#mpuAndPermissions) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. If your Identity and Access Management (IAM) user or role is in the same Amazon Web Services account as the KMS key, then you must have these permissions on the key policy. If your IAM user or role belongs to a different account than the key, then you must have the permissions on both the key policy and your IAM user or role. For more information, see Protecting Data Using Server-Side Encryption (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/serv-side-encryption.html). Access Permissions When copying an object, you can optionally specify the accounts or groups that should be granted specific permissions on the new object. There are two ways to grant the permissions using the request headers:

* Specify a canned ACL with the x-amz-acl request header. For more information, see Canned ACL (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html#CannedACL).

* Specify access permissions explicitly with the x-amz-grant-read, x-amz-grant-read-acp, x-amz-grant-write-acp, and x-amz-grant-full-control headers. These parameters map to the set of permissions that Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html).

You can use either a canned ACL or specify access permissions explicitly. You cannot do both. Server-Side- Encryption-Specific Request Headers You can optionally tell Amazon S3 to encrypt data at rest using server-side encryption. Server-side encryption is for data encryption at rest. Amazon S3 encrypts your data as it writes it to disks in its data centers and decrypts it when you access it. The option you use depends on whether you want to use Amazon Web Services managed encryption keys or provide your own encryption key.

* Use encryption keys managed by Amazon S3 or customer managed key stored in Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (Amazon Web Services KMS) – If you want Amazon Web Services to manage the keys used to encrypt data, specify the following headers in the request.

* x-amz-server-side-encryption

* x-amz-server-side-encryption-aws-kms-key-id

* x-amz-server-side-encryption-context

If you specify x-amz-server-side-encryption:aws:kms, but don't provide x-amz-server-side-encryption-aws-kms-key-id, Amazon S3 uses the Amazon Web Services managed key in Amazon Web Services KMS to protect the data. All GET and PUT requests for an object protected by Amazon Web Services KMS fail if you don't make them with SSL or by using SigV4. For more information about server-side encryption with KMS key (SSE-KMS), see Protecting Data Using Server-Side Encryption with KMS keys (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/UsingKMSEncryption.html).

* Use customer-provided encryption keys – If you want to manage your own encryption keys, provide all the following headers in the request.

* x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm

* x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key

* x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key-MD5

For more information about server-side encryption with KMS keys (SSE-KMS), see Protecting Data Using Server-Side Encryption with KMS keys (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/UsingKMSEncryption.html).

Access-Control-List (ACL)-Specific Request Headers You also can use the following access control–related headers with this operation. By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access control. When adding a new object, you can grant permissions to individual Amazon Web Services accounts or to predefined groups defined by Amazon S3. These permissions are then added to the access control list (ACL) on the object. For more information, see Using ACLs (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/S3_ACLs_UsingACLs.html). With this operation, you can grant access permissions using one of the following two methods:

* Specify a canned ACL (x-amz-acl) — Amazon S3 supports a set of predefined ACLs, known as canned ACLs. Each canned ACL has a predefined set of grantees and permissions. For more information, see Canned ACL (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html#CannedACL).

* Specify access permissions explicitly — To explicitly grant access permissions to specific Amazon Web Services accounts or groups, use the following headers. Each header maps to specific permissions that Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html). In the header, you specify a list of grantees who get the specific permission. To grant permissions explicitly, use:

* x-amz-grant-read

* x-amz-grant-write

* x-amz-grant-read-acp

* x-amz-grant-write-acp

* x-amz-grant-full-control

You specify each grantee as a type=value pair, where the type is one of the following:

* id – if the value specified is the canonical user ID of an Amazon Web Services account

* uri – if you are granting permissions to a predefined group

* emailAddress – if the value specified is the email address of an Amazon Web Services account Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:

* US East (N. Virginia)

* US West (N. California)

* US West (Oregon)

* Asia Pacific (Singapore)

* Asia Pacific (Sydney)

* Asia Pacific (Tokyo)

* Europe (Ireland)

* South America (São Paulo)

For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/general/latest/gr/rande.html#s3_region) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.

For example, the following x-amz-grant-read header grants the Amazon Web Services accounts identified by account IDs permissions to read object data and its metadata: x-amz-grant-read: id="11112222333", id="444455556666"

The following operations are related to CreateMultipartUpload:

* UploadPart (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_UploadPart.html)

* CompleteMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CompleteMultipartUpload.html)

* AbortMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_AbortMultipartUpload.html)

* ListParts (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListParts.html)

* ListMultipartUploads (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListMultipartUploads.html)

func (*Client) DeleteBucket

func (c *Client) DeleteBucket(ctx context.Context, params *DeleteBucketInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*DeleteBucketOutput, error)

Deletes the S3 bucket. All objects (including all object versions and delete markers) in the bucket must be deleted before the bucket itself can be deleted. Related Resources

* CreateBucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateBucket.html)

* DeleteObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteObject.html)

func (*Client) DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfiguration

func (c *Client) DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfiguration(ctx context.Context, params *DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfigurationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfigurationOutput, error)

Deletes an analytics configuration for the bucket (specified by the analytics configuration ID). To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutAnalyticsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html). For information about the Amazon S3 analytics feature, see Amazon S3 Analytics – Storage Class Analysis (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/analytics-storage-class.html). The following operations are related to DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfiguration:

* GetBucketAnalyticsConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketAnalyticsConfiguration.html)

* ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurations.html)

* PutBucketAnalyticsConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketAnalyticsConfiguration.html)

func (*Client) DeleteBucketCors

func (c *Client) DeleteBucketCors(ctx context.Context, params *DeleteBucketCorsInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*DeleteBucketCorsOutput, error)

Deletes the cors configuration information set for the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:PutBucketCORS action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others. For information about cors, see Enabling Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/cors.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Related Resources:

* PutBucketCors (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketCors.html)

* RESTOPTIONSobject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/RESTOPTIONSobject.html)

func (*Client) DeleteBucketEncryption

func (c *Client) DeleteBucketEncryption(ctx context.Context, params *DeleteBucketEncryptionInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*DeleteBucketEncryptionOutput, error)

This implementation of the DELETE action removes default encryption from the bucket. For information about the Amazon S3 default encryption feature, see Amazon S3 Default Bucket Encryption (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/bucket-encryption.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutEncryptionConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Related Resources

* PutBucketEncryption (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketEncryption.html)

* GetBucketEncryption (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketEncryption.html)

func (*Client) DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration added in v0.31.0

func (c *Client) DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration(ctx context.Context, params *DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationOutput, error)

Deletes the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration from the specified bucket. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is designed to optimize storage costs by automatically moving data to the most cost-effective storage access tier, without performance impact or operational overhead. S3 Intelligent-Tiering delivers automatic cost savings in three low latency and high throughput access tiers. To get the lowest storage cost on data that can be accessed in minutes to hours, you can choose to activate additional archiving capabilities. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is the ideal storage class for data with unknown, changing, or unpredictable access patterns, independent of object size or retention period. If the size of an object is less than 128 KB, it is not monitored and not eligible for auto-tiering. Smaller objects can be stored, but they are always charged at the Frequent Access tier rates in the S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class. For more information, see Storage class for automatically optimizing frequently and infrequently accessed objects (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/storage-class-intro.html#sc-dynamic-data-access). Operations related to DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration include:

* GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration.html)

* PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration.html)

* ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurations.html)

func (*Client) DeleteBucketInventoryConfiguration

func (c *Client) DeleteBucketInventoryConfiguration(ctx context.Context, params *DeleteBucketInventoryConfigurationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*DeleteBucketInventoryConfigurationOutput, error)

Deletes an inventory configuration (identified by the inventory ID) from the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutInventoryConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html). For information about the Amazon S3 inventory feature, see Amazon S3 Inventory (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/storage-inventory.html). Operations related to DeleteBucketInventoryConfiguration include:

* GetBucketInventoryConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketInventoryConfiguration.html)

* PutBucketInventoryConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketInventoryConfiguration.html)

* ListBucketInventoryConfigurations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListBucketInventoryConfigurations.html)

func (*Client) DeleteBucketLifecycle

func (c *Client) DeleteBucketLifecycle(ctx context.Context, params *DeleteBucketLifecycleInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*DeleteBucketLifecycleOutput, error)

Deletes the lifecycle configuration from the specified bucket. Amazon S3 removes all the lifecycle configuration rules in the lifecycle subresource associated with the bucket. Your objects never expire, and Amazon S3 no longer automatically deletes any objects on the basis of rules contained in the deleted lifecycle configuration. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:PutLifecycleConfiguration action. By default, the bucket owner has this permission and the bucket owner can grant this permission to others. There is usually some time lag before lifecycle configuration deletion is fully propagated to all the Amazon S3 systems. For more information about the object expiration, see Elements to Describe Lifecycle Actions (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/intro-lifecycle-rules.html#intro-lifecycle-rules-actions). Related actions include:

* PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration.html)

* GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration.html)

func (*Client) DeleteBucketMetricsConfiguration

func (c *Client) DeleteBucketMetricsConfiguration(ctx context.Context, params *DeleteBucketMetricsConfigurationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*DeleteBucketMetricsConfigurationOutput, error)

Deletes a metrics configuration for the Amazon CloudWatch request metrics (specified by the metrics configuration ID) from the bucket. Note that this doesn't include the daily storage metrics. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutMetricsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html). For information about CloudWatch request metrics for Amazon S3, see Monitoring Metrics with Amazon CloudWatch (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/cloudwatch-monitoring.html). The following operations are related to DeleteBucketMetricsConfiguration:

* GetBucketMetricsConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketMetricsConfiguration.html)

* PutBucketMetricsConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketMetricsConfiguration.html)

* ListBucketMetricsConfigurations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListBucketMetricsConfigurations.html)

* Monitoring Metrics with Amazon CloudWatch (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/cloudwatch-monitoring.html)

func (*Client) DeleteBucketOwnershipControls added in v0.29.0

func (c *Client) DeleteBucketOwnershipControls(ctx context.Context, params *DeleteBucketOwnershipControlsInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*DeleteBucketOwnershipControlsOutput, error)

Removes OwnershipControls for an Amazon S3 bucket. To use this operation, you must have the s3:PutBucketOwnershipControls permission. For more information about Amazon S3 permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/using-with-s3-actions.html). For information about Amazon S3 Object Ownership, see Using Object Ownership (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/about-object-ownership.html). The following operations are related to DeleteBucketOwnershipControls:

* GetBucketOwnershipControls

* PutBucketOwnershipControls

func (*Client) DeleteBucketPolicy

func (c *Client) DeleteBucketPolicy(ctx context.Context, params *DeleteBucketPolicyInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*DeleteBucketPolicyOutput, error)

This implementation of the DELETE action uses the policy subresource to delete the policy of a specified bucket. If you are using an identity other than the root user of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the bucket, the calling identity must have the DeleteBucketPolicy permissions on the specified bucket and belong to the bucket owner's account to use this operation. If you don't have DeleteBucketPolicy permissions, Amazon S3 returns a 403 Access Denied error. If you have the correct permissions, but you're not using an identity that belongs to the bucket owner's account, Amazon S3 returns a 405 Method Not Allowed error. As a security precaution, the root user of the Amazon Web Services account that owns a bucket can always use this operation, even if the policy explicitly denies the root user the ability to perform this action. For more information about bucket policies, see Using Bucket Policies and UserPolicies (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/using-iam-policies.html). The following operations are related to DeleteBucketPolicy

* CreateBucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateBucket.html)

* DeleteObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteObject.html)

func (*Client) DeleteBucketReplication

func (c *Client) DeleteBucketReplication(ctx context.Context, params *DeleteBucketReplicationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*DeleteBucketReplicationOutput, error)

Deletes the replication configuration from the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutReplicationConfiguration action. The bucket owner has these permissions by default and can grant it to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html). It can take a while for the deletion of a replication configuration to fully propagate. For information about replication configuration, see Replication (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/replication.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. The following operations are related to DeleteBucketReplication:

* PutBucketReplication (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketReplication.html)

* GetBucketReplication (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketReplication.html)

func (*Client) DeleteBucketTagging

func (c *Client) DeleteBucketTagging(ctx context.Context, params *DeleteBucketTaggingInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*DeleteBucketTaggingOutput, error)

Deletes the tags from the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:PutBucketTagging action. By default, the bucket owner has this permission and can grant this permission to others. The following operations are related to DeleteBucketTagging:

* GetBucketTagging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketTagging.html)

* PutBucketTagging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketTagging.html)

func (*Client) DeleteBucketWebsite

func (c *Client) DeleteBucketWebsite(ctx context.Context, params *DeleteBucketWebsiteInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*DeleteBucketWebsiteOutput, error)

This action removes the website configuration for a bucket. Amazon S3 returns a 200 OK response upon successfully deleting a website configuration on the specified bucket. You will get a 200 OK response if the website configuration you are trying to delete does not exist on the bucket. Amazon S3 returns a 404 response if the bucket specified in the request does not exist. This DELETE action requires the S3:DeleteBucketWebsite permission. By default, only the bucket owner can delete the website configuration attached to a bucket. However, bucket owners can grant other users permission to delete the website configuration by writing a bucket policy granting them the S3:DeleteBucketWebsite permission. For more information about hosting websites, see Hosting Websites on Amazon S3 (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/WebsiteHosting.html). The following operations are related to DeleteBucketWebsite:

* GetBucketWebsite (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketWebsite.html)

* PutBucketWebsite (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketWebsite.html)

func (*Client) DeleteObject

func (c *Client) DeleteObject(ctx context.Context, params *DeleteObjectInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*DeleteObjectOutput, error)

Removes the null version (if there is one) of an object and inserts a delete marker, which becomes the latest version of the object. If there isn't a null version, Amazon S3 does not remove any objects but will still respond that the command was successful. To remove a specific version, you must be the bucket owner and you must use the version Id subresource. Using this subresource permanently deletes the version. If the object deleted is a delete marker, Amazon S3 sets the response header, x-amz-delete-marker, to true. If the object you want to delete is in a bucket where the bucket versioning configuration is MFA Delete enabled, you must include the x-amz-mfa request header in the DELETE versionId request. Requests that include x-amz-mfa must use HTTPS. For more information about MFA Delete, see Using MFA Delete (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/UsingMFADelete.html). To see sample requests that use versioning, see Sample Request (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/RESTObjectDELETE.html#ExampleVersionObjectDelete). You can delete objects by explicitly calling DELETE Object or configure its lifecycle (PutBucketLifecycle (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketLifecycle.html)) to enable Amazon S3 to remove them for you. If you want to block users or accounts from removing or deleting objects from your bucket, you must deny them the s3:DeleteObject, s3:DeleteObjectVersion, and s3:PutLifeCycleConfiguration actions. The following action is related to DeleteObject:

* PutObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutObject.html)

func (*Client) DeleteObjectTagging

func (c *Client) DeleteObjectTagging(ctx context.Context, params *DeleteObjectTaggingInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*DeleteObjectTaggingOutput, error)

Removes the entire tag set from the specified object. For more information about managing object tags, see Object Tagging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/object-tagging.html). To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:DeleteObjectTagging action. To delete tags of a specific object version, add the versionId query parameter in the request. You will need permission for the s3:DeleteObjectVersionTagging action. The following operations are related to DeleteBucketMetricsConfiguration:

* PutObjectTagging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutObjectTagging.html)

* GetObjectTagging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObjectTagging.html)

func (*Client) DeleteObjects

func (c *Client) DeleteObjects(ctx context.Context, params *DeleteObjectsInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*DeleteObjectsOutput, error)

This action enables you to delete multiple objects from a bucket using a single HTTP request. If you know the object keys that you want to delete, then this action provides a suitable alternative to sending individual delete requests, reducing per-request overhead. The request contains a list of up to 1000 keys that you want to delete. In the XML, you provide the object key names, and optionally, version IDs if you want to delete a specific version of the object from a versioning-enabled bucket. For each key, Amazon S3 performs a delete action and returns the result of that delete, success, or failure, in the response. Note that if the object specified in the request is not found, Amazon S3 returns the result as deleted. The action supports two modes for the response: verbose and quiet. By default, the action uses verbose mode in which the response includes the result of deletion of each key in your request. In quiet mode the response includes only keys where the delete action encountered an error. For a successful deletion, the action does not return any information about the delete in the response body. When performing this action on an MFA Delete enabled bucket, that attempts to delete any versioned objects, you must include an MFA token. If you do not provide one, the entire request will fail, even if there are non-versioned objects you are trying to delete. If you provide an invalid token, whether there are versioned keys in the request or not, the entire Multi-Object Delete request will fail. For information about MFA Delete, see MFA Delete (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/Versioning.html#MultiFactorAuthenticationDelete). Finally, the Content-MD5 header is required for all Multi-Object Delete requests. Amazon S3 uses the header value to ensure that your request body has not been altered in transit. The following operations are related to DeleteObjects:

* CreateMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateMultipartUpload.html)

* UploadPart (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_UploadPart.html)

* CompleteMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CompleteMultipartUpload.html)

* ListParts (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListParts.html)

* AbortMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_AbortMultipartUpload.html)

func (*Client) DeletePublicAccessBlock

func (c *Client) DeletePublicAccessBlock(ctx context.Context, params *DeletePublicAccessBlockInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*DeletePublicAccessBlockOutput, error)

Removes the PublicAccessBlock configuration for an Amazon S3 bucket. To use this operation, you must have the s3:PutBucketPublicAccessBlock permission. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html). The following operations are related to DeletePublicAccessBlock:

* Using Amazon S3 Block Public Access (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/access-control-block-public-access.html)

* GetPublicAccessBlock (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetPublicAccessBlock.html)

* PutPublicAccessBlock (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutPublicAccessBlock.html)

* GetBucketPolicyStatus (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketPolicyStatus.html)

func (*Client) GetBucketAccelerateConfiguration

func (c *Client) GetBucketAccelerateConfiguration(ctx context.Context, params *GetBucketAccelerateConfigurationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetBucketAccelerateConfigurationOutput, error)

This implementation of the GET action uses the accelerate subresource to return the Transfer Acceleration state of a bucket, which is either Enabled or Suspended. Amazon S3 Transfer Acceleration is a bucket-level feature that enables you to perform faster data transfers to and from Amazon S3. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:GetAccelerateConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. You set the Transfer Acceleration state of an existing bucket to Enabled or Suspended by using the PutBucketAccelerateConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketAccelerateConfiguration.html) operation. A GET accelerate request does not return a state value for a bucket that has no transfer acceleration state. A bucket has no Transfer Acceleration state if a state has never been set on the bucket. For more information about transfer acceleration, see Transfer Acceleration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/transfer-acceleration.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Related Resources

* PutBucketAccelerateConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketAccelerateConfiguration.html)

func (*Client) GetBucketAcl

func (c *Client) GetBucketAcl(ctx context.Context, params *GetBucketAclInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetBucketAclOutput, error)

This implementation of the GET action uses the acl subresource to return the access control list (ACL) of a bucket. To use GET to return the ACL of the bucket, you must have READ_ACP access to the bucket. If READ_ACP permission is granted to the anonymous user, you can return the ACL of the bucket without using an authorization header. If your bucket uses the bucket owner enforced setting for S3 Object Ownership, requests to read ACLs are still supported and return the bucket-owner-full-control ACL with the owner being the account that created the bucket. For more information, see Controlling object ownership and disabling ACLs (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/about-object-ownership.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Related Resources

* ListObjects (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListObjects.html)

func (*Client) GetBucketAnalyticsConfiguration

func (c *Client) GetBucketAnalyticsConfiguration(ctx context.Context, params *GetBucketAnalyticsConfigurationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetBucketAnalyticsConfigurationOutput, error)

This implementation of the GET action returns an analytics configuration (identified by the analytics configuration ID) from the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:GetAnalyticsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For information about Amazon S3 analytics feature, see Amazon S3 Analytics – Storage Class Analysis (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/analytics-storage-class.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Related Resources

* DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfiguration.html)

* ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurations.html)

* PutBucketAnalyticsConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketAnalyticsConfiguration.html)

func (*Client) GetBucketCors

func (c *Client) GetBucketCors(ctx context.Context, params *GetBucketCorsInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetBucketCorsOutput, error)

Returns the Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS) configuration information set for the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:GetBucketCORS action. By default, the bucket owner has this permission and can grant it to others. For more information about CORS, see Enabling Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/cors.html). The following operations are related to GetBucketCors:

* PutBucketCors (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketCors.html)

* DeleteBucketCors (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketCors.html)

func (*Client) GetBucketEncryption

func (c *Client) GetBucketEncryption(ctx context.Context, params *GetBucketEncryptionInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetBucketEncryptionOutput, error)

Returns the default encryption configuration for an Amazon S3 bucket. If the bucket does not have a default encryption configuration, GetBucketEncryption returns ServerSideEncryptionConfigurationNotFoundError. For information about the Amazon S3 default encryption feature, see Amazon S3 Default Bucket Encryption (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/bucket-encryption.html). To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:GetEncryptionConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html). The following operations are related to GetBucketEncryption:

* PutBucketEncryption (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketEncryption.html)

* DeleteBucketEncryption (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketEncryption.html)

func (*Client) GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration added in v0.31.0

func (c *Client) GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration(ctx context.Context, params *GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationOutput, error)

Gets the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration from the specified bucket. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is designed to optimize storage costs by automatically moving data to the most cost-effective storage access tier, without performance impact or operational overhead. S3 Intelligent-Tiering delivers automatic cost savings in three low latency and high throughput access tiers. To get the lowest storage cost on data that can be accessed in minutes to hours, you can choose to activate additional archiving capabilities. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is the ideal storage class for data with unknown, changing, or unpredictable access patterns, independent of object size or retention period. If the size of an object is less than 128 KB, it is not monitored and not eligible for auto-tiering. Smaller objects can be stored, but they are always charged at the Frequent Access tier rates in the S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class. For more information, see Storage class for automatically optimizing frequently and infrequently accessed objects (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/storage-class-intro.html#sc-dynamic-data-access). Operations related to GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration include:

* DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration.html)

* PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration.html)

* ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurations.html)

func (*Client) GetBucketInventoryConfiguration

func (c *Client) GetBucketInventoryConfiguration(ctx context.Context, params *GetBucketInventoryConfigurationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetBucketInventoryConfigurationOutput, error)

Returns an inventory configuration (identified by the inventory configuration ID) from the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:GetInventoryConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html). For information about the Amazon S3 inventory feature, see Amazon S3 Inventory (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/storage-inventory.html). The following operations are related to GetBucketInventoryConfiguration:

* DeleteBucketInventoryConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketInventoryConfiguration.html)

* ListBucketInventoryConfigurations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListBucketInventoryConfigurations.html)

* PutBucketInventoryConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketInventoryConfiguration.html)

func (*Client) GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration

func (c *Client) GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration(ctx context.Context, params *GetBucketLifecycleConfigurationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetBucketLifecycleConfigurationOutput, error)

Bucket lifecycle configuration now supports specifying a lifecycle rule using an object key name prefix, one or more object tags, or a combination of both. Accordingly, this section describes the latest API. The response describes the new filter element that you can use to specify a filter to select a subset of objects to which the rule applies. If you are using a previous version of the lifecycle configuration, it still works. For the earlier action, see GetBucketLifecycle (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketLifecycle.html). Returns the lifecycle configuration information set on the bucket. For information about lifecycle configuration, see Object Lifecycle Management (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/object-lifecycle-mgmt.html). To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:GetLifecycleConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission, by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html). GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration has the following special error:

* Error code: NoSuchLifecycleConfiguration

* Description: The lifecycle configuration does not exist.

* HTTP Status Code: 404 Not Found

* SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client

The following operations are related to GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration:

* GetBucketLifecycle (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketLifecycle.html)

* PutBucketLifecycle (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketLifecycle.html)

* DeleteBucketLifecycle (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketLifecycle.html)

func (*Client) GetBucketLocation

func (c *Client) GetBucketLocation(ctx context.Context, params *GetBucketLocationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetBucketLocationOutput, error)

Returns the Region the bucket resides in. You set the bucket's Region using the LocationConstraint request parameter in a CreateBucket request. For more information, see CreateBucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateBucket.html). To use this implementation of the operation, you must be the bucket owner. To use this API against an access point, provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name. The following operations are related to GetBucketLocation:

* GetObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObject.html)

* CreateBucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateBucket.html)

func (*Client) GetBucketLogging

func (c *Client) GetBucketLogging(ctx context.Context, params *GetBucketLoggingInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetBucketLoggingOutput, error)

Returns the logging status of a bucket and the permissions users have to view and modify that status. To use GET, you must be the bucket owner. The following operations are related to GetBucketLogging:

* CreateBucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateBucket.html)

* PutBucketLogging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketLogging.html)

func (*Client) GetBucketMetricsConfiguration

func (c *Client) GetBucketMetricsConfiguration(ctx context.Context, params *GetBucketMetricsConfigurationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetBucketMetricsConfigurationOutput, error)

Gets a metrics configuration (specified by the metrics configuration ID) from the bucket. Note that this doesn't include the daily storage metrics. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:GetMetricsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html). For information about CloudWatch request metrics for Amazon S3, see Monitoring Metrics with Amazon CloudWatch (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/cloudwatch-monitoring.html). The following operations are related to GetBucketMetricsConfiguration:

* PutBucketMetricsConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketMetricsConfiguration.html)

* DeleteBucketMetricsConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketMetricsConfiguration.html)

* ListBucketMetricsConfigurations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListBucketMetricsConfigurations.html)

* Monitoring Metrics with Amazon CloudWatch (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/cloudwatch-monitoring.html)

func (*Client) GetBucketNotificationConfiguration

func (c *Client) GetBucketNotificationConfiguration(ctx context.Context, params *GetBucketNotificationConfigurationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetBucketNotificationConfigurationOutput, error)

Returns the notification configuration of a bucket. If notifications are not enabled on the bucket, the action returns an empty NotificationConfiguration element. By default, you must be the bucket owner to read the notification configuration of a bucket. However, the bucket owner can use a bucket policy to grant permission to other users to read this configuration with the s3:GetBucketNotification permission. For more information about setting and reading the notification configuration on a bucket, see Setting Up Notification of Bucket Events (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/NotificationHowTo.html). For more information about bucket policies, see Using Bucket Policies (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/using-iam-policies.html). The following action is related to GetBucketNotification:

* PutBucketNotification (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketNotification.html)

func (*Client) GetBucketOwnershipControls added in v0.29.0

func (c *Client) GetBucketOwnershipControls(ctx context.Context, params *GetBucketOwnershipControlsInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetBucketOwnershipControlsOutput, error)

Retrieves OwnershipControls for an Amazon S3 bucket. To use this operation, you must have the s3:GetBucketOwnershipControls permission. For more information about Amazon S3 permissions, see Specifying permissions in a policy (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html). For information about Amazon S3 Object Ownership, see Using Object Ownership (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/about-object-ownership.html). The following operations are related to GetBucketOwnershipControls:

* PutBucketOwnershipControls

* DeleteBucketOwnershipControls

func (*Client) GetBucketPolicy

func (c *Client) GetBucketPolicy(ctx context.Context, params *GetBucketPolicyInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetBucketPolicyOutput, error)

Returns the policy of a specified bucket. If you are using an identity other than the root user of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the bucket, the calling identity must have the GetBucketPolicy permissions on the specified bucket and belong to the bucket owner's account in order to use this operation. If you don't have GetBucketPolicy permissions, Amazon S3 returns a 403 Access Denied error. If you have the correct permissions, but you're not using an identity that belongs to the bucket owner's account, Amazon S3 returns a 405 Method Not Allowed error. As a security precaution, the root user of the Amazon Web Services account that owns a bucket can always use this operation, even if the policy explicitly denies the root user the ability to perform this action. For more information about bucket policies, see Using Bucket Policies and User Policies (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/using-iam-policies.html). The following action is related to GetBucketPolicy:

* GetObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObject.html)

func (*Client) GetBucketPolicyStatus

func (c *Client) GetBucketPolicyStatus(ctx context.Context, params *GetBucketPolicyStatusInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetBucketPolicyStatusOutput, error)

Retrieves the policy status for an Amazon S3 bucket, indicating whether the bucket is public. In order to use this operation, you must have the s3:GetBucketPolicyStatus permission. For more information about Amazon S3 permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/using-with-s3-actions.html). For more information about when Amazon S3 considers a bucket public, see The Meaning of "Public" (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/access-control-block-public-access.html#access-control-block-public-access-policy-status). The following operations are related to GetBucketPolicyStatus:

* Using Amazon S3 Block Public Access (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/access-control-block-public-access.html)

* GetPublicAccessBlock (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetPublicAccessBlock.html)

* PutPublicAccessBlock (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutPublicAccessBlock.html)

* DeletePublicAccessBlock (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeletePublicAccessBlock.html)

func (*Client) GetBucketReplication

func (c *Client) GetBucketReplication(ctx context.Context, params *GetBucketReplicationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetBucketReplicationOutput, error)

Returns the replication configuration of a bucket. It can take a while to propagate the put or delete a replication configuration to all Amazon S3 systems. Therefore, a get request soon after put or delete can return a wrong result. For information about replication configuration, see Replication (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/replication.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This action requires permissions for the s3:GetReplicationConfiguration action. For more information about permissions, see Using Bucket Policies and User Policies (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/using-iam-policies.html). If you include the Filter element in a replication configuration, you must also include the DeleteMarkerReplication and Priority elements. The response also returns those elements. For information about GetBucketReplication errors, see List of replication-related error codes (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/ErrorResponses.html#ReplicationErrorCodeList) The following operations are related to GetBucketReplication:

* PutBucketReplication (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketReplication.html)

* DeleteBucketReplication (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketReplication.html)

func (*Client) GetBucketRequestPayment

func (c *Client) GetBucketRequestPayment(ctx context.Context, params *GetBucketRequestPaymentInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetBucketRequestPaymentOutput, error)

Returns the request payment configuration of a bucket. To use this version of the operation, you must be the bucket owner. For more information, see Requester Pays Buckets (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/RequesterPaysBuckets.html). The following operations are related to GetBucketRequestPayment:

* ListObjects (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListObjects.html)

func (*Client) GetBucketTagging

func (c *Client) GetBucketTagging(ctx context.Context, params *GetBucketTaggingInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetBucketTaggingOutput, error)

Returns the tag set associated with the bucket. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:GetBucketTagging action. By default, the bucket owner has this permission and can grant this permission to others. GetBucketTagging has the following special error:

* Error code: NoSuchTagSet

* Description: There is no tag set associated with the bucket.

The following operations are related to GetBucketTagging:

* PutBucketTagging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketTagging.html)

* DeleteBucketTagging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketTagging.html)

func (*Client) GetBucketVersioning

func (c *Client) GetBucketVersioning(ctx context.Context, params *GetBucketVersioningInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetBucketVersioningOutput, error)

Returns the versioning state of a bucket. To retrieve the versioning state of a bucket, you must be the bucket owner. This implementation also returns the MFA Delete status of the versioning state. If the MFA Delete status is enabled, the bucket owner must use an authentication device to change the versioning state of the bucket. The following operations are related to GetBucketVersioning:

* GetObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObject.html)

* PutObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutObject.html)

* DeleteObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteObject.html)

func (*Client) GetBucketWebsite

func (c *Client) GetBucketWebsite(ctx context.Context, params *GetBucketWebsiteInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetBucketWebsiteOutput, error)

Returns the website configuration for a bucket. To host website on Amazon S3, you can configure a bucket as website by adding a website configuration. For more information about hosting websites, see Hosting Websites on Amazon S3 (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/WebsiteHosting.html). This GET action requires the S3:GetBucketWebsite permission. By default, only the bucket owner can read the bucket website configuration. However, bucket owners can allow other users to read the website configuration by writing a bucket policy granting them the S3:GetBucketWebsite permission. The following operations are related to DeleteBucketWebsite:

* DeleteBucketWebsite (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketWebsite.html)

* PutBucketWebsite (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketWebsite.html)

func (*Client) GetObject

func (c *Client) GetObject(ctx context.Context, params *GetObjectInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetObjectOutput, error)

Retrieves objects from Amazon S3. To use GET, you must have READ access to the object. If you grant READ access to the anonymous user, you can return the object without using an authorization header. An Amazon S3 bucket has no directory hierarchy such as you would find in a typical computer file system. You can, however, create a logical hierarchy by using object key names that imply a folder structure. For example, instead of naming an object sample.jpg, you can name it photos/2006/February/sample.jpg. To get an object from such a logical hierarchy, specify the full key name for the object in the GET operation. For a virtual hosted-style request example, if you have the object photos/2006/February/sample.jpg, specify the resource as /photos/2006/February/sample.jpg. For a path-style request example, if you have the object photos/2006/February/sample.jpg in the bucket named examplebucket, specify the resource as /examplebucket/photos/2006/February/sample.jpg. For more information about request types, see HTTP Host Header Bucket Specification (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/VirtualHosting.html#VirtualHostingSpecifyBucket). For more information about returning the ACL of an object, see GetObjectAcl (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObjectAcl.html). If the object you are retrieving is stored in the S3 Glacier or S3 Glacier Deep Archive storage class, or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Archive or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Deep Archive tiers, before you can retrieve the object you must first restore a copy using RestoreObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_RestoreObject.html). Otherwise, this action returns an InvalidObjectStateError error. For information about restoring archived objects, see Restoring Archived Objects (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/restoring-objects.html). Encryption request headers, like x-amz-server-side-encryption, should not be sent for GET requests if your object uses server-side encryption with KMS keys (SSE-KMS) or server-side encryption with Amazon S3–managed encryption keys (SSE-S3). If your object does use these types of keys, you’ll get an HTTP 400 BadRequest error. If you encrypt an object by using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C) when you store the object in Amazon S3, then when you GET the object, you must use the following headers:

* x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm

* x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key

* x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key-MD5

For more information about SSE-C, see Server-Side Encryption (Using Customer-Provided Encryption Keys) (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ServerSideEncryptionCustomerKeys.html). Assuming you have the relevant permission to read object tags, the response also returns the x-amz-tagging-count header that provides the count of number of tags associated with the object. You can use GetObjectTagging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObjectTagging.html) to retrieve the tag set associated with an object. Permissions You need the relevant read object (or version) permission for this operation. For more information, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/using-with-s3-actions.html). If the object you request does not exist, the error Amazon S3 returns depends on whether you also have the s3:ListBucket permission.

* If you have the s3:ListBucket permission on the bucket, Amazon S3 will return an HTTP status code 404 ("no such key") error.

* If you don’t have the s3:ListBucket permission, Amazon S3 will return an HTTP status code 403 ("access denied") error.

Versioning By default, the GET action returns the current version of an object. To return a different version, use the versionId subresource.

* If you supply a versionId, you need the s3:GetObjectVersion permission to access a specific version of an object. If you request a specific version, you do not need to have the s3:GetObject permission.

* If the current version of the object is a delete marker, Amazon S3 behaves as if the object was deleted and includes x-amz-delete-marker: true in the response.

For more information about versioning, see PutBucketVersioning (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketVersioning.html). Overriding Response Header Values There are times when you want to override certain response header values in a GET response. For example, you might override the Content-Disposition response header value in your GET request. You can override values for a set of response headers using the following query parameters. These response header values are sent only on a successful request, that is, when status code 200 OK is returned. The set of headers you can override using these parameters is a subset of the headers that Amazon S3 accepts when you create an object. The response headers that you can override for the GET response are Content-Type, Content-Language, Expires, Cache-Control, Content-Disposition, and Content-Encoding. To override these header values in the GET response, you use the following request parameters. You must sign the request, either using an Authorization header or a presigned URL, when using these parameters. They cannot be used with an unsigned (anonymous) request.

* response-content-type

* response-content-language

* response-expires

* response-cache-control

* response-content-disposition

* response-content-encoding

Additional Considerations about Request Headers If both of the If-Match and If-Unmodified-Since headers are present in the request as follows: If-Match condition evaluates to true, and; If-Unmodified-Since condition evaluates to false; then, S3 returns 200 OK and the data requested. If both of the If-None-Match and If-Modified-Since headers are present in the request as follows: If-None-Match condition evaluates to false, and; If-Modified-Since condition evaluates to true; then, S3 returns 304 Not Modified response code. For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232 (https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7232). The following operations are related to GetObject:

* ListBuckets (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListBuckets.html)

* GetObjectAcl (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObjectAcl.html)

func (*Client) GetObjectAcl

func (c *Client) GetObjectAcl(ctx context.Context, params *GetObjectAclInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetObjectAclOutput, error)

Returns the access control list (ACL) of an object. To use this operation, you must have s3:GetObjectAcl permissions or READ_ACP access to the object. For more information, see Mapping of ACL permissions and access policy permissions (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/acl-overview.html#acl-access-policy-permission-mapping) in the Amazon S3 User Guide This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts. Versioning By default, GET returns ACL information about the current version of an object. To return ACL information about a different version, use the versionId subresource. If your bucket uses the bucket owner enforced setting for S3 Object Ownership, requests to read ACLs are still supported and return the bucket-owner-full-control ACL with the owner being the account that created the bucket. For more information, see Controlling object ownership and disabling ACLs (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/about-object-ownership.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. The following operations are related to GetObjectAcl:

* GetObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObject.html)

* GetObjectAttributes (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObjectAttributes.html)

* DeleteObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteObject.html)

* PutObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutObject.html)

func (*Client) GetObjectAttributes added in v1.25.0

func (c *Client) GetObjectAttributes(ctx context.Context, params *GetObjectAttributesInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetObjectAttributesOutput, error)

Retrieves all the metadata from an object without returning the object itself. This action is useful if you're interested only in an object's metadata. To use GetObjectAttributes, you must have READ access to the object. GetObjectAttributes combines the functionality of GetObjectAcl, GetObjectLegalHold, GetObjectLockConfiguration, GetObjectRetention, GetObjectTagging, HeadObject, and ListParts. All of the data returned with each of those individual calls can be returned with a single call to GetObjectAttributes. If you encrypt an object by using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C) when you store the object in Amazon S3, then when you retrieve the metadata from the object, you must use the following headers:

* x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm

* x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key

* x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key-MD5

For more information about SSE-C, see Server-Side Encryption (Using Customer-Provided Encryption Keys) (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ServerSideEncryptionCustomerKeys.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

* Encryption request headers, such as x-amz-server-side-encryption, should not be sent for GET requests if your object uses server-side encryption with Amazon Web Services KMS keys stored in Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (SSE-KMS) or server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed encryption keys (SSE-S3). If your object does use these types of keys, you'll get an HTTP 400 Bad Request error.

* The last modified property in this case is the creation date of the object.

Consider the following when using request headers:

* If both of the If-Match and If-Unmodified-Since headers are present in the request as follows, then Amazon S3 returns the HTTP status code 200 OK and the data requested:

* If-Match condition evaluates to true.

* If-Unmodified-Since condition evaluates to false.

* If both of the If-None-Match and If-Modified-Since headers are present in the request as follows, then Amazon S3 returns the HTTP status code 304 Not Modified:

* If-None-Match condition evaluates to false.

* If-Modified-Since condition evaluates to true.

For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232 (https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7232). Permissions The permissions that you need to use this operation depend on whether the bucket is versioned. If the bucket is versioned, you need both the s3:GetObjectVersion and s3:GetObjectVersionAttributes permissions for this operation. If the bucket is not versioned, you need the s3:GetObject and s3:GetObjectAttributes permissions. For more information, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/using-with-s3-actions.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. If the object that you request does not exist, the error Amazon S3 returns depends on whether you also have the s3:ListBucket permission.

* If you have the s3:ListBucket permission on the bucket, Amazon S3 returns an HTTP status code 404 Not Found ("no such key") error.

* If you don't have the s3:ListBucket permission, Amazon S3 returns an HTTP status code 403 Forbidden ("access denied") error.

The following actions are related to GetObjectAttributes:

* GetObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObject.html)

* GetObjectAcl (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObjectAcl.html)

* GetObjectLegalHold (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObjectLegalHold.html)

* GetObjectLockConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObjectLockConfiguration.html)

* GetObjectRetention (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObjectRetention.html)

* GetObjectTagging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObjectTagging.html)

* HeadObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_HeadObject.html)

* ListParts (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListParts.html)

func (*Client) GetObjectLegalHold

func (c *Client) GetObjectLegalHold(ctx context.Context, params *GetObjectLegalHoldInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetObjectLegalHoldOutput, error)

Gets an object's current legal hold status. For more information, see Locking Objects (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/object-lock.html). This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts. The following action is related to GetObjectLegalHold:

* GetObjectAttributes (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObjectAttributes.html)

func (*Client) GetObjectLockConfiguration

func (c *Client) GetObjectLockConfiguration(ctx context.Context, params *GetObjectLockConfigurationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetObjectLockConfigurationOutput, error)

Gets the Object Lock configuration for a bucket. The rule specified in the Object Lock configuration will be applied by default to every new object placed in the specified bucket. For more information, see Locking Objects (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/object-lock.html). The following action is related to GetObjectLockConfiguration:

* GetObjectAttributes (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObjectAttributes.html)

func (*Client) GetObjectRetention

func (c *Client) GetObjectRetention(ctx context.Context, params *GetObjectRetentionInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetObjectRetentionOutput, error)

Retrieves an object's retention settings. For more information, see Locking Objects (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/object-lock.html). This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts. The following action is related to GetObjectRetention:

* GetObjectAttributes (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObjectAttributes.html)

func (*Client) GetObjectTagging

func (c *Client) GetObjectTagging(ctx context.Context, params *GetObjectTaggingInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetObjectTaggingOutput, error)

Returns the tag-set of an object. You send the GET request against the tagging subresource associated with the object. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:GetObjectTagging action. By default, the GET action returns information about current version of an object. For a versioned bucket, you can have multiple versions of an object in your bucket. To retrieve tags of any other version, use the versionId query parameter. You also need permission for the s3:GetObjectVersionTagging action. By default, the bucket owner has this permission and can grant this permission to others. For information about the Amazon S3 object tagging feature, see Object Tagging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/object-tagging.html). The following actions are related to GetObjectTagging:

* DeleteObjectTagging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteObjectTagging.html)

* GetObjectAttributes (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObjectAttributes.html)

* PutObjectTagging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutObjectTagging.html)

func (*Client) GetObjectTorrent

func (c *Client) GetObjectTorrent(ctx context.Context, params *GetObjectTorrentInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetObjectTorrentOutput, error)

Returns torrent files from a bucket. BitTorrent can save you bandwidth when you're distributing large files. For more information about BitTorrent, see Using BitTorrent with Amazon S3 (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/S3Torrent.html). You can get torrent only for objects that are less than 5 GB in size, and that are not encrypted using server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key. To use GET, you must have READ access to the object. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts. The following action is related to GetObjectTorrent:

* GetObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObject.html)

func (*Client) GetPublicAccessBlock

func (c *Client) GetPublicAccessBlock(ctx context.Context, params *GetPublicAccessBlockInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*GetPublicAccessBlockOutput, error)

Retrieves the PublicAccessBlock configuration for an Amazon S3 bucket. To use this operation, you must have the s3:GetBucketPublicAccessBlock permission. For more information about Amazon S3 permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/using-with-s3-actions.html). When Amazon S3 evaluates the PublicAccessBlock configuration for a bucket or an object, it checks the PublicAccessBlock configuration for both the bucket (or the bucket that contains the object) and the bucket owner's account. If the PublicAccessBlock settings are different between the bucket and the account, Amazon S3 uses the most restrictive combination of the bucket-level and account-level settings. For more information about when Amazon S3 considers a bucket or an object public, see The Meaning of "Public" (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/access-control-block-public-access.html#access-control-block-public-access-policy-status). The following operations are related to GetPublicAccessBlock:

* Using Amazon S3 Block Public Access (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/access-control-block-public-access.html)

* PutPublicAccessBlock (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutPublicAccessBlock.html)

* GetPublicAccessBlock (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetPublicAccessBlock.html)

* DeletePublicAccessBlock (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeletePublicAccessBlock.html)

func (*Client) HeadBucket

func (c *Client) HeadBucket(ctx context.Context, params *HeadBucketInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*HeadBucketOutput, error)

This action is useful to determine if a bucket exists and you have permission to access it. The action returns a 200 OK if the bucket exists and you have permission to access it. If the bucket does not exist or you do not have permission to access it, the HEAD request returns a generic 404 Not Found or 403 Forbidden code. A message body is not included, so you cannot determine the exception beyond these error codes. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:ListBucket action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html). To use this API against an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information see, Using access points (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html).

func (*Client) HeadObject

func (c *Client) HeadObject(ctx context.Context, params *HeadObjectInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*HeadObjectOutput, error)

The HEAD action retrieves metadata from an object without returning the object itself. This action is useful if you're only interested in an object's metadata. To use HEAD, you must have READ access to the object. A HEAD request has the same options as a GET action on an object. The response is identical to the GET response except that there is no response body. Because of this, if the HEAD request generates an error, it returns a generic 404 Not Found or 403 Forbidden code. It is not possible to retrieve the exact exception beyond these error codes. If you encrypt an object by using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C) when you store the object in Amazon S3, then when you retrieve the metadata from the object, you must use the following headers:

* x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm

* x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key

* x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key-MD5

For more information about SSE-C, see Server-Side Encryption (Using Customer-Provided Encryption Keys) (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ServerSideEncryptionCustomerKeys.html).

* Encryption request headers, like x-amz-server-side-encryption, should not be sent for GET requests if your object uses server-side encryption with KMS keys (SSE-KMS) or server-side encryption with Amazon S3–managed encryption keys (SSE-S3). If your object does use these types of keys, you’ll get an HTTP 400 BadRequest error.

* The last modified property in this case is the creation date of the object.

Request headers are limited to 8 KB in size. For more information, see Common Request Headers (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/RESTCommonRequestHeaders.html). Consider the following when using request headers:

* Consideration 1 – If both of the If-Match and If-Unmodified-Since headers are present in the request as follows:

* If-Match condition evaluates to true, and;

* If-Unmodified-Since condition evaluates to false;

Then Amazon S3 returns 200 OK and the data requested.

* Consideration 2 – If both of the If-None-Match and If-Modified-Since headers are present in the request as follows:

* If-None-Match condition evaluates to false, and;

* If-Modified-Since condition evaluates to true;

Then Amazon S3 returns the 304 Not Modified response code.

For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232 (https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7232). Permissions You need the relevant read object (or version) permission for this operation. For more information, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/using-with-s3-actions.html). If the object you request does not exist, the error Amazon S3 returns depends on whether you also have the s3:ListBucket permission.

* If you have the s3:ListBucket permission on the bucket, Amazon S3 returns an HTTP status code 404 ("no such key") error.

* If you don’t have the s3:ListBucket permission, Amazon S3 returns an HTTP status code 403 ("access denied") error.

The following actions are related to HeadObject:

* GetObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObject.html)

* GetObjectAttributes (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObjectAttributes.html)

func (*Client) ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurations

func (c *Client) ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurations(ctx context.Context, params *ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurationsInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurationsOutput, error)

Lists the analytics configurations for the bucket. You can have up to 1,000 analytics configurations per bucket. This action supports list pagination and does not return more than 100 configurations at a time. You should always check the IsTruncated element in the response. If there are no more configurations to list, IsTruncated is set to false. If there are more configurations to list, IsTruncated is set to true, and there will be a value in NextContinuationToken. You use the NextContinuationToken value to continue the pagination of the list by passing the value in continuation-token in the request to GET the next page. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:GetAnalyticsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html). For information about Amazon S3 analytics feature, see Amazon S3 Analytics – Storage Class Analysis (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/analytics-storage-class.html). The following operations are related to ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurations:

* GetBucketAnalyticsConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketAnalyticsConfiguration.html)

* DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfiguration.html)

* PutBucketAnalyticsConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketAnalyticsConfiguration.html)

func (*Client) ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurations added in v0.31.0

func (c *Client) ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurations(ctx context.Context, params *ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationsInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationsOutput, error)

Lists the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration from the specified bucket. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is designed to optimize storage costs by automatically moving data to the most cost-effective storage access tier, without performance impact or operational overhead. S3 Intelligent-Tiering delivers automatic cost savings in three low latency and high throughput access tiers. To get the lowest storage cost on data that can be accessed in minutes to hours, you can choose to activate additional archiving capabilities. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is the ideal storage class for data with unknown, changing, or unpredictable access patterns, independent of object size or retention period. If the size of an object is less than 128 KB, it is not monitored and not eligible for auto-tiering. Smaller objects can be stored, but they are always charged at the Frequent Access tier rates in the S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class. For more information, see Storage class for automatically optimizing frequently and infrequently accessed objects (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/storage-class-intro.html#sc-dynamic-data-access). Operations related to ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurations include:

* DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration.html)

* PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration.html)

* GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration.html)

func (*Client) ListBucketInventoryConfigurations

func (c *Client) ListBucketInventoryConfigurations(ctx context.Context, params *ListBucketInventoryConfigurationsInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*ListBucketInventoryConfigurationsOutput, error)

Returns a list of inventory configurations for the bucket. You can have up to 1,000 analytics configurations per bucket. This action supports list pagination and does not return more than 100 configurations at a time. Always check the IsTruncated element in the response. If there are no more configurations to list, IsTruncated is set to false. If there are more configurations to list, IsTruncated is set to true, and there is a value in NextContinuationToken. You use the NextContinuationToken value to continue the pagination of the list by passing the value in continuation-token in the request to GET the next page. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:GetInventoryConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html). For information about the Amazon S3 inventory feature, see Amazon S3 Inventory (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/storage-inventory.html) The following operations are related to ListBucketInventoryConfigurations:

* GetBucketInventoryConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketInventoryConfiguration.html)

* DeleteBucketInventoryConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketInventoryConfiguration.html)

* PutBucketInventoryConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketInventoryConfiguration.html)

func (*Client) ListBucketMetricsConfigurations

func (c *Client) ListBucketMetricsConfigurations(ctx context.Context, params *ListBucketMetricsConfigurationsInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*ListBucketMetricsConfigurationsOutput, error)

Lists the metrics configurations for the bucket. The metrics configurations are only for the request metrics of the bucket and do not provide information on daily storage metrics. You can have up to 1,000 configurations per bucket. This action supports list pagination and does not return more than 100 configurations at a time. Always check the IsTruncated element in the response. If there are no more configurations to list, IsTruncated is set to false. If there are more configurations to list, IsTruncated is set to true, and there is a value in NextContinuationToken. You use the NextContinuationToken value to continue the pagination of the list by passing the value in continuation-token in the request to GET the next page. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:GetMetricsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html). For more information about metrics configurations and CloudWatch request metrics, see Monitoring Metrics with Amazon CloudWatch (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/cloudwatch-monitoring.html). The following operations are related to ListBucketMetricsConfigurations:

* PutBucketMetricsConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketMetricsConfiguration.html)

* GetBucketMetricsConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketMetricsConfiguration.html)

* DeleteBucketMetricsConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketMetricsConfiguration.html)

func (*Client) ListBuckets

func (c *Client) ListBuckets(ctx context.Context, params *ListBucketsInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*ListBucketsOutput, error)

Returns a list of all buckets owned by the authenticated sender of the request. To use this operation, you must have the s3:ListAllMyBuckets permission.

func (*Client) ListMultipartUploads

func (c *Client) ListMultipartUploads(ctx context.Context, params *ListMultipartUploadsInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*ListMultipartUploadsOutput, error)

This action lists in-progress multipart uploads. An in-progress multipart upload is a multipart upload that has been initiated using the Initiate Multipart Upload request, but has not yet been completed or aborted. This action returns at most 1,000 multipart uploads in the response. 1,000 multipart uploads is the maximum number of uploads a response can include, which is also the default value. You can further limit the number of uploads in a response by specifying the max-uploads parameter in the response. If additional multipart uploads satisfy the list criteria, the response will contain an IsTruncated element with the value true. To list the additional multipart uploads, use the key-marker and upload-id-marker request parameters. In the response, the uploads are sorted by key. If your application has initiated more than one multipart upload using the same object key, then uploads in the response are first sorted by key. Additionally, uploads are sorted in ascending order within each key by the upload initiation time. For more information on multipart uploads, see Uploading Objects Using Multipart Upload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/uploadobjusingmpu.html). For information on permissions required to use the multipart upload API, see Multipart Upload and Permissions (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/mpuAndPermissions.html). The following operations are related to ListMultipartUploads:

* CreateMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateMultipartUpload.html)

* UploadPart (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_UploadPart.html)

* CompleteMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CompleteMultipartUpload.html)

* ListParts (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListParts.html)

* AbortMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_AbortMultipartUpload.html)

func (*Client) ListObjectVersions

func (c *Client) ListObjectVersions(ctx context.Context, params *ListObjectVersionsInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*ListObjectVersionsOutput, error)

Returns metadata about all versions of the objects in a bucket. You can also use request parameters as selection criteria to return metadata about a subset of all the object versions. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:ListBucketVersions action. Be aware of the name difference. A 200 OK response can contain valid or invalid XML. Make sure to design your application to parse the contents of the response and handle it appropriately. To use this operation, you must have READ access to the bucket. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts. The following operations are related to ListObjectVersions:

* ListObjectsV2 (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListObjectsV2.html)

* GetObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObject.html)

* PutObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutObject.html)

* DeleteObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteObject.html)

func (*Client) ListObjects

func (c *Client) ListObjects(ctx context.Context, params *ListObjectsInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*ListObjectsOutput, error)

Returns some or all (up to 1,000) of the objects in a bucket. You can use the request parameters as selection criteria to return a subset of the objects in a bucket. A 200 OK response can contain valid or invalid XML. Be sure to design your application to parse the contents of the response and handle it appropriately. This action has been revised. We recommend that you use the newer version, ListObjectsV2 (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListObjectsV2.html), when developing applications. For backward compatibility, Amazon S3 continues to support ListObjects. The following operations are related to ListObjects:

* ListObjectsV2 (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListObjectsV2.html)

* GetObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObject.html)

* PutObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutObject.html)

* CreateBucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateBucket.html)

* ListBuckets (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListBuckets.html)

func (*Client) ListObjectsV2

func (c *Client) ListObjectsV2(ctx context.Context, params *ListObjectsV2Input, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*ListObjectsV2Output, error)

Returns some or all (up to 1,000) of the objects in a bucket with each request. You can use the request parameters as selection criteria to return a subset of the objects in a bucket. A 200 OK response can contain valid or invalid XML. Make sure to design your application to parse the contents of the response and handle it appropriately. Objects are returned sorted in an ascending order of the respective key names in the list. For more information about listing objects, see Listing object keys programmatically (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/ListingKeysUsingAPIs.html) To use this operation, you must have READ access to the bucket. To use this action in an Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, you must have permissions to perform the s3:ListBucket action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html). This section describes the latest revision of this action. We recommend that you use this revised API for application development. For backward compatibility, Amazon S3 continues to support the prior version of this API, ListObjects (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListObjects.html). To get a list of your buckets, see ListBuckets (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListBuckets.html). The following operations are related to ListObjectsV2:

* GetObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObject.html)

* PutObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutObject.html)

* CreateBucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateBucket.html)

func (*Client) ListParts

func (c *Client) ListParts(ctx context.Context, params *ListPartsInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*ListPartsOutput, error)

Lists the parts that have been uploaded for a specific multipart upload. This operation must include the upload ID, which you obtain by sending the initiate multipart upload request (see CreateMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateMultipartUpload.html)). This request returns a maximum of 1,000 uploaded parts. The default number of parts returned is 1,000 parts. You can restrict the number of parts returned by specifying the max-parts request parameter. If your multipart upload consists of more than 1,000 parts, the response returns an IsTruncated field with the value of true, and a NextPartNumberMarker element. In subsequent ListParts requests you can include the part-number-marker query string parameter and set its value to the NextPartNumberMarker field value from the previous response. If the upload was created using a checksum algorithm, you will need to have permission to the kms:Decrypt action for the request to succeed. For more information on multipart uploads, see Uploading Objects Using Multipart Upload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/uploadobjusingmpu.html). For information on permissions required to use the multipart upload API, see Multipart Upload and Permissions (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/mpuAndPermissions.html). The following operations are related to ListParts:

* CreateMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateMultipartUpload.html)

* UploadPart (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_UploadPart.html)

* CompleteMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CompleteMultipartUpload.html)

* AbortMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_AbortMultipartUpload.html)

* GetObjectAttributes (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObjectAttributes.html)

* ListMultipartUploads (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListMultipartUploads.html)

func (*Client) PutBucketAccelerateConfiguration

func (c *Client) PutBucketAccelerateConfiguration(ctx context.Context, params *PutBucketAccelerateConfigurationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutBucketAccelerateConfigurationOutput, error)

Sets the accelerate configuration of an existing bucket. Amazon S3 Transfer Acceleration is a bucket-level feature that enables you to perform faster data transfers to Amazon S3. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:PutAccelerateConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html). The Transfer Acceleration state of a bucket can be set to one of the following two values:

* Enabled – Enables accelerated data transfers to the bucket.

* Suspended – Disables accelerated data transfers to the bucket.

The GetBucketAccelerateConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketAccelerateConfiguration.html) action returns the transfer acceleration state of a bucket. After setting the Transfer Acceleration state of a bucket to Enabled, it might take up to thirty minutes before the data transfer rates to the bucket increase. The name of the bucket used for Transfer Acceleration must be DNS-compliant and must not contain periods ("."). For more information about transfer acceleration, see Transfer Acceleration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/transfer-acceleration.html). The following operations are related to PutBucketAccelerateConfiguration:

* GetBucketAccelerateConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketAccelerateConfiguration.html)

* CreateBucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateBucket.html)

func (*Client) PutBucketAcl

func (c *Client) PutBucketAcl(ctx context.Context, params *PutBucketAclInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutBucketAclOutput, error)

Sets the permissions on an existing bucket using access control lists (ACL). For more information, see Using ACLs (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/S3_ACLs_UsingACLs.html). To set the ACL of a bucket, you must have WRITE_ACP permission. You can use one of the following two ways to set a bucket's permissions:

* Specify the ACL in the request body

* Specify permissions using request headers

You cannot specify access permission using both the body and the request headers. Depending on your application needs, you may choose to set the ACL on a bucket using either the request body or the headers. For example, if you have an existing application that updates a bucket ACL using the request body, then you can continue to use that approach. If your bucket uses the bucket owner enforced setting for S3 Object Ownership, ACLs are disabled and no longer affect permissions. You must use policies to grant access to your bucket and the objects in it. Requests to set ACLs or update ACLs fail and return the AccessControlListNotSupported error code. Requests to read ACLs are still supported. For more information, see Controlling object ownership (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/about-object-ownership.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access Permissions You can set access permissions using one of the following methods:

* Specify a canned ACL with the x-amz-acl request header. Amazon S3 supports a set of predefined ACLs, known as canned ACLs. Each canned ACL has a predefined set of grantees and permissions. Specify the canned ACL name as the value of x-amz-acl. If you use this header, you cannot use other access control-specific headers in your request. For more information, see Canned ACL (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html#CannedACL).

* Specify access permissions explicitly with the x-amz-grant-read, x-amz-grant-read-acp, x-amz-grant-write-acp, and x-amz-grant-full-control headers. When using these headers, you specify explicit access permissions and grantees (Amazon Web Services accounts or Amazon S3 groups) who will receive the permission. If you use these ACL-specific headers, you cannot use the x-amz-acl header to set a canned ACL. These parameters map to the set of permissions that Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html). You specify each grantee as a type=value pair, where the type is one of the following:

* id – if the value specified is the canonical user ID of an Amazon Web Services account

* uri – if you are granting permissions to a predefined group

* emailAddress – if the value specified is the email address of an Amazon Web Services account Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:

* US East (N. Virginia)

* US West (N. California)

* US West (Oregon)

* Asia Pacific (Singapore)

* Asia Pacific (Sydney)

* Asia Pacific (Tokyo)

* Europe (Ireland)

* South America (São Paulo)

For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/general/latest/gr/rande.html#s3_region) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.

For example, the following x-amz-grant-write header grants create, overwrite, and delete objects permission to LogDelivery group predefined by Amazon S3 and two Amazon Web Services accounts identified by their email addresses. x-amz-grant-write: uri="http://acs.amazonaws.com/groups/s3/LogDelivery", id="111122223333", id="555566667777"

You can use either a canned ACL or specify access permissions explicitly. You cannot do both. Grantee Values You can specify the person (grantee) to whom you're assigning access rights (using request elements) in the following ways:

* By the person's ID: <>ID<><>GranteesEmail<> DisplayName is optional and ignored in the request

* By URI: <>http://acs.amazonaws.com/groups/global/AuthenticatedUsers<>

* By Email address: <>Grantees@email.com<>lt;/Grantee> The grantee is resolved to the CanonicalUser and, in a response to a GET Object acl request, appears as the CanonicalUser. Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:

* US East (N. Virginia)

* US West (N. California)

* US West (Oregon)

* Asia Pacific (Singapore)

* Asia Pacific (Sydney)

* Asia Pacific (Tokyo)

* Europe (Ireland)

* South America (São Paulo)

For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/general/latest/gr/rande.html#s3_region) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.

* CreateBucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateBucket.html)

* DeleteBucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucket.html)

* GetObjectAcl (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObjectAcl.html)

func (*Client) PutBucketAnalyticsConfiguration

func (c *Client) PutBucketAnalyticsConfiguration(ctx context.Context, params *PutBucketAnalyticsConfigurationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutBucketAnalyticsConfigurationOutput, error)

Sets an analytics configuration for the bucket (specified by the analytics configuration ID). You can have up to 1,000 analytics configurations per bucket. You can choose to have storage class analysis export analysis reports sent to a comma-separated values (CSV) flat file. See the DataExport request element. Reports are updated daily and are based on the object filters that you configure. When selecting data export, you specify a destination bucket and an optional destination prefix where the file is written. You can export the data to a destination bucket in a different account. However, the destination bucket must be in the same Region as the bucket that you are making the PUT analytics configuration to. For more information, see Amazon S3 Analytics – Storage Class Analysis (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/analytics-storage-class.html). You must create a bucket policy on the destination bucket where the exported file is written to grant permissions to Amazon S3 to write objects to the bucket. For an example policy, see Granting Permissions for Amazon S3 Inventory and Storage Class Analysis (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/example-bucket-policies.html#example-bucket-policies-use-case-9). To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutAnalyticsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html). Special Errors

* HTTP Error: HTTP 400 Bad Request

* Code: InvalidArgument

* Cause: Invalid argument.

* HTTP Error: HTTP 400 Bad Request

* Code: TooManyConfigurations

* Cause: You are attempting to create a new configuration but have already reached the 1,000-configuration limit.

* HTTP Error: HTTP 403 Forbidden

* Code: AccessDenied

* Cause: You are not the owner of the specified bucket, or you do not have the s3:PutAnalyticsConfiguration bucket permission to set the configuration on the bucket.

* GetBucketAnalyticsConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketAnalyticsConfiguration.html)

* DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfiguration.html)

* ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurations.html)

func (*Client) PutBucketCors

func (c *Client) PutBucketCors(ctx context.Context, params *PutBucketCorsInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutBucketCorsOutput, error)

Sets the cors configuration for your bucket. If the configuration exists, Amazon S3 replaces it. To use this operation, you must be allowed to perform the s3:PutBucketCORS action. By default, the bucket owner has this permission and can grant it to others. You set this configuration on a bucket so that the bucket can service cross-origin requests. For example, you might want to enable a request whose origin is http://www.example.com to access your Amazon S3 bucket at my.example.bucket.com by using the browser's XMLHttpRequest capability. To enable cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) on a bucket, you add the cors subresource to the bucket. The cors subresource is an XML document in which you configure rules that identify origins and the HTTP methods that can be executed on your bucket. The document is limited to 64 KB in size. When Amazon S3 receives a cross-origin request (or a pre-flight OPTIONS request) against a bucket, it evaluates the cors configuration on the bucket and uses the first CORSRule rule that matches the incoming browser request to enable a cross-origin request. For a rule to match, the following conditions must be met:

* The request's Origin header must match AllowedOrigin elements.

* The request method (for example, GET, PUT, HEAD, and so on) or the Access-Control-Request-Method header in case of a pre-flight OPTIONS request must be one of the AllowedMethod elements.

* Every header specified in the Access-Control-Request-Headers request header of a pre-flight request must match an AllowedHeader element.

For more information about CORS, go to Enabling Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/cors.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Related Resources

* GetBucketCors (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketCors.html)

* DeleteBucketCors (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketCors.html)

* RESTOPTIONSobject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/RESTOPTIONSobject.html)

func (*Client) PutBucketEncryption

func (c *Client) PutBucketEncryption(ctx context.Context, params *PutBucketEncryptionInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutBucketEncryptionOutput, error)

This action uses the encryption subresource to configure default encryption and Amazon S3 Bucket Key for an existing bucket. Default encryption for a bucket can use server-side encryption with Amazon S3-managed keys (SSE-S3) or customer managed keys (SSE-KMS). If you specify default encryption using SSE-KMS, you can also configure Amazon S3 Bucket Key. When the default encryption is SSE-KMS, if you upload an object to the bucket and do not specify the KMS key to use for encryption, Amazon S3 uses the default Amazon Web Services managed KMS key for your account. For information about default encryption, see Amazon S3 default bucket encryption (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/bucket-encryption.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For more information about S3 Bucket Keys, see Amazon S3 Bucket Keys (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/bucket-key.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This action requires Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4. For more information, see Authenticating Requests (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/sig-v4-authenticating-requests.html). To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutEncryptionConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Related Resources

* GetBucketEncryption (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketEncryption.html)

* DeleteBucketEncryption (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketEncryption.html)

func (*Client) PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration added in v0.31.0

func (c *Client) PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration(ctx context.Context, params *PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationOutput, error)

Puts a S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration to the specified bucket. You can have up to 1,000 S3 Intelligent-Tiering configurations per bucket. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is designed to optimize storage costs by automatically moving data to the most cost-effective storage access tier, without performance impact or operational overhead. S3 Intelligent-Tiering delivers automatic cost savings in three low latency and high throughput access tiers. To get the lowest storage cost on data that can be accessed in minutes to hours, you can choose to activate additional archiving capabilities. The S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class is the ideal storage class for data with unknown, changing, or unpredictable access patterns, independent of object size or retention period. If the size of an object is less than 128 KB, it is not monitored and not eligible for auto-tiering. Smaller objects can be stored, but they are always charged at the Frequent Access tier rates in the S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class. For more information, see Storage class for automatically optimizing frequently and infrequently accessed objects (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/storage-class-intro.html#sc-dynamic-data-access). Operations related to PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration include:

* DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration.html)

* GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfiguration.html)

* ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurations.html)

You only need S3 Intelligent-Tiering enabled on a bucket if you want to automatically move objects stored in the S3 Intelligent-Tiering storage class to the Archive Access or Deep Archive Access tier. Special Errors

* HTTP 400 Bad Request Error

* Code: InvalidArgument

* Cause: Invalid Argument

* HTTP 400 Bad Request Error

* Code: TooManyConfigurations

* Cause: You are attempting to create a new configuration but have already reached the 1,000-configuration limit.

* HTTP 403 Forbidden Error

* Code: AccessDenied

* Cause: You are not the owner of the specified bucket, or you do not have the s3:PutIntelligentTieringConfiguration bucket permission to set the configuration on the bucket.

func (*Client) PutBucketInventoryConfiguration

func (c *Client) PutBucketInventoryConfiguration(ctx context.Context, params *PutBucketInventoryConfigurationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutBucketInventoryConfigurationOutput, error)

This implementation of the PUT action adds an inventory configuration (identified by the inventory ID) to the bucket. You can have up to 1,000 inventory configurations per bucket. Amazon S3 inventory generates inventories of the objects in the bucket on a daily or weekly basis, and the results are published to a flat file. The bucket that is inventoried is called the source bucket, and the bucket where the inventory flat file is stored is called the destination bucket. The destination bucket must be in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the source bucket. When you configure an inventory for a source bucket, you specify the destination bucket where you want the inventory to be stored, and whether to generate the inventory daily or weekly. You can also configure what object metadata to include and whether to inventory all object versions or only current versions. For more information, see Amazon S3 Inventory (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/storage-inventory.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. You must create a bucket policy on the destination bucket to grant permissions to Amazon S3 to write objects to the bucket in the defined location. For an example policy, see Granting Permissions for Amazon S3 Inventory and Storage Class Analysis (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/example-bucket-policies.html#example-bucket-policies-use-case-9). To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutInventoryConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Special Errors

* HTTP 400 Bad Request Error

* Code: InvalidArgument

* Cause: Invalid Argument

* HTTP 400 Bad Request Error

* Code: TooManyConfigurations

* Cause: You are attempting to create a new configuration but have already reached the 1,000-configuration limit.

* HTTP 403 Forbidden Error

* Code: AccessDenied

* Cause: You are not the owner of the specified bucket, or you do not have the s3:PutInventoryConfiguration bucket permission to set the configuration on the bucket.

* GetBucketInventoryConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketInventoryConfiguration.html)

* DeleteBucketInventoryConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketInventoryConfiguration.html)

* ListBucketInventoryConfigurations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListBucketInventoryConfigurations.html)

func (*Client) PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration

func (c *Client) PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration(ctx context.Context, params *PutBucketLifecycleConfigurationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutBucketLifecycleConfigurationOutput, error)

Creates a new lifecycle configuration for the bucket or replaces an existing lifecycle configuration. Keep in mind that this will overwrite an existing lifecycle configuration, so if you want to retain any configuration details, they must be included in the new lifecycle configuration. For information about lifecycle configuration, see Managing your storage lifecycle (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/object-lifecycle-mgmt.html). Bucket lifecycle configuration now supports specifying a lifecycle rule using an object key name prefix, one or more object tags, or a combination of both. Accordingly, this section describes the latest API. The previous version of the API supported filtering based only on an object key name prefix, which is supported for backward compatibility. For the related API description, see PutBucketLifecycle (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketLifecycle.html). Rules You specify the lifecycle configuration in your request body. The lifecycle configuration is specified as XML consisting of one or more rules. An Amazon S3 Lifecycle configuration can have up to 1,000 rules. This limit is not adjustable. Each rule consists of the following:

* Filter identifying a subset of objects to which the rule applies. The filter can be based on a key name prefix, object tags, or a combination of both.

* Status whether the rule is in effect.

* One or more lifecycle transition and expiration actions that you want Amazon S3 to perform on the objects identified by the filter. If the state of your bucket is versioning-enabled or versioning-suspended, you can have many versions of the same object (one current version and zero or more noncurrent versions). Amazon S3 provides predefined actions that you can specify for current and noncurrent object versions.

For more information, see Object Lifecycle Management (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/object-lifecycle-mgmt.html) and Lifecycle Configuration Elements (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/intro-lifecycle-rules.html). Permissions By default, all Amazon S3 resources are private, including buckets, objects, and related subresources (for example, lifecycle configuration and website configuration). Only the resource owner (that is, the Amazon Web Services account that created it) can access the resource. The resource owner can optionally grant access permissions to others by writing an access policy. For this operation, a user must get the s3:PutLifecycleConfiguration permission. You can also explicitly deny permissions. Explicit deny also supersedes any other permissions. If you want to block users or accounts from removing or deleting objects from your bucket, you must deny them permissions for the following actions:

* s3:DeleteObject

* s3:DeleteObjectVersion

* s3:PutLifecycleConfiguration

For more information about permissions, see Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html). The following are related to PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration:

* Examples of Lifecycle Configuration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/lifecycle-configuration-examples.html)

* GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration.html)

* DeleteBucketLifecycle (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketLifecycle.html)

func (*Client) PutBucketLogging

func (c *Client) PutBucketLogging(ctx context.Context, params *PutBucketLoggingInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutBucketLoggingOutput, error)

Set the logging parameters for a bucket and to specify permissions for who can view and modify the logging parameters. All logs are saved to buckets in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the source bucket. To set the logging status of a bucket, you must be the bucket owner. The bucket owner is automatically granted FULL_CONTROL to all logs. You use the Grantee request element to grant access to other people. The Permissions request element specifies the kind of access the grantee has to the logs. If the target bucket for log delivery uses the bucket owner enforced setting for S3 Object Ownership, you can't use the Grantee request element to grant access to others. Permissions can only be granted using policies. For more information, see Permissions for server access log delivery (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/enable-server-access-logging.html#grant-log-delivery-permissions-general) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Grantee Values You can specify the person (grantee) to whom you're assigning access rights (using request elements) in the following ways:

* By the person's ID: <>ID<><>GranteesEmail<> DisplayName is optional and ignored in the request.

* By Email address: <>Grantees@email.com<> The grantee is resolved to the CanonicalUser and, in a response to a GET Object acl request, appears as the CanonicalUser.

* By URI: <>http://acs.amazonaws.com/groups/global/AuthenticatedUsers<>

To enable logging, you use LoggingEnabled and its children request elements. To disable logging, you use an empty BucketLoggingStatus request element: For more information about server access logging, see Server Access Logging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/ServerLogs.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For more information about creating a bucket, see CreateBucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateBucket.html). For more information about returning the logging status of a bucket, see GetBucketLogging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketLogging.html). The following operations are related to PutBucketLogging:

* PutObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutObject.html)

* DeleteBucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucket.html)

* CreateBucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateBucket.html)

* GetBucketLogging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketLogging.html)

func (*Client) PutBucketMetricsConfiguration

func (c *Client) PutBucketMetricsConfiguration(ctx context.Context, params *PutBucketMetricsConfigurationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutBucketMetricsConfigurationOutput, error)

Sets a metrics configuration (specified by the metrics configuration ID) for the bucket. You can have up to 1,000 metrics configurations per bucket. If you're updating an existing metrics configuration, note that this is a full replacement of the existing metrics configuration. If you don't include the elements you want to keep, they are erased. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutMetricsConfiguration action. The bucket owner has this permission by default. The bucket owner can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html). For information about CloudWatch request metrics for Amazon S3, see Monitoring Metrics with Amazon CloudWatch (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/cloudwatch-monitoring.html). The following operations are related to PutBucketMetricsConfiguration:

* DeleteBucketMetricsConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketMetricsConfiguration.html)

* GetBucketMetricsConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketMetricsConfiguration.html)

* ListBucketMetricsConfigurations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListBucketMetricsConfigurations.html)

GetBucketLifecycle has the following special error:

* Error code: TooManyConfigurations

* Description: You are attempting to create a new configuration but have already reached the 1,000-configuration limit.

* HTTP Status Code: HTTP 400 Bad Request

func (*Client) PutBucketNotificationConfiguration

func (c *Client) PutBucketNotificationConfiguration(ctx context.Context, params *PutBucketNotificationConfigurationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutBucketNotificationConfigurationOutput, error)

Enables notifications of specified events for a bucket. For more information about event notifications, see Configuring Event Notifications (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/NotificationHowTo.html). Using this API, you can replace an existing notification configuration. The configuration is an XML file that defines the event types that you want Amazon S3 to publish and the destination where you want Amazon S3 to publish an event notification when it detects an event of the specified type. By default, your bucket has no event notifications configured. That is, the notification configuration will be an empty NotificationConfiguration. This action replaces the existing notification configuration with the configuration you include in the request body. After Amazon S3 receives this request, it first verifies that any Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS) or Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS) destination exists, and that the bucket owner has permission to publish to it by sending a test notification. In the case of Lambda destinations, Amazon S3 verifies that the Lambda function permissions grant Amazon S3 permission to invoke the function from the Amazon S3 bucket. For more information, see Configuring Notifications for Amazon S3 Events (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/NotificationHowTo.html). You can disable notifications by adding the empty NotificationConfiguration element. For more information about the number of event notification configurations that you can create per bucket, see Amazon S3 service quotas (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/general/latest/gr/s3.html#limits_s3) in Amazon Web Services General Reference. By default, only the bucket owner can configure notifications on a bucket. However, bucket owners can use a bucket policy to grant permission to other users to set this configuration with s3:PutBucketNotification permission. The PUT notification is an atomic operation. For example, suppose your notification configuration includes SNS topic, SQS queue, and Lambda function configurations. When you send a PUT request with this configuration, Amazon S3 sends test messages to your SNS topic. If the message fails, the entire PUT action will fail, and Amazon S3 will not add the configuration to your bucket. Responses If the configuration in the request body includes only one TopicConfiguration specifying only the s3:ReducedRedundancyLostObject event type, the response will also include the x-amz-sns-test-message-id header containing the message ID of the test notification sent to the topic. The following action is related to PutBucketNotificationConfiguration:

* GetBucketNotificationConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketNotificationConfiguration.html)

func (*Client) PutBucketOwnershipControls added in v0.29.0

func (c *Client) PutBucketOwnershipControls(ctx context.Context, params *PutBucketOwnershipControlsInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutBucketOwnershipControlsOutput, error)

Creates or modifies OwnershipControls for an Amazon S3 bucket. To use this operation, you must have the s3:PutBucketOwnershipControls permission. For more information about Amazon S3 permissions, see Specifying permissions in a policy (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/user-guide/using-with-s3-actions.html). For information about Amazon S3 Object Ownership, see Using object ownership (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/user-guide/about-object-ownership.html). The following operations are related to PutBucketOwnershipControls:

* GetBucketOwnershipControls

* DeleteBucketOwnershipControls

func (*Client) PutBucketPolicy

func (c *Client) PutBucketPolicy(ctx context.Context, params *PutBucketPolicyInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutBucketPolicyOutput, error)

Applies an Amazon S3 bucket policy to an Amazon S3 bucket. If you are using an identity other than the root user of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the bucket, the calling identity must have the PutBucketPolicy permissions on the specified bucket and belong to the bucket owner's account in order to use this operation. If you don't have PutBucketPolicy permissions, Amazon S3 returns a 403 Access Denied error. If you have the correct permissions, but you're not using an identity that belongs to the bucket owner's account, Amazon S3 returns a 405 Method Not Allowed error. As a security precaution, the root user of the Amazon Web Services account that owns a bucket can always use this operation, even if the policy explicitly denies the root user the ability to perform this action. For more information, see Bucket policy examples (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/example-bucket-policies.html). The following operations are related to PutBucketPolicy:

* CreateBucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateBucket.html)

* DeleteBucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucket.html)

func (*Client) PutBucketReplication

func (c *Client) PutBucketReplication(ctx context.Context, params *PutBucketReplicationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutBucketReplicationOutput, error)

Creates a replication configuration or replaces an existing one. For more information, see Replication (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/replication.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Specify the replication configuration in the request body. In the replication configuration, you provide the name of the destination bucket or buckets where you want Amazon S3 to replicate objects, the IAM role that Amazon S3 can assume to replicate objects on your behalf, and other relevant information. A replication configuration must include at least one rule, and can contain a maximum of 1,000. Each rule identifies a subset of objects to replicate by filtering the objects in the source bucket. To choose additional subsets of objects to replicate, add a rule for each subset. To specify a subset of the objects in the source bucket to apply a replication rule to, add the Filter element as a child of the Rule element. You can filter objects based on an object key prefix, one or more object tags, or both. When you add the Filter element in the configuration, you must also add the following elements: DeleteMarkerReplication, Status, and Priority. If you are using an earlier version of the replication configuration, Amazon S3 handles replication of delete markers differently. For more information, see Backward Compatibility (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/replication-add-config.html#replication-backward-compat-considerations). For information about enabling versioning on a bucket, see Using Versioning (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/Versioning.html). Handling Replication of Encrypted Objects By default, Amazon S3 doesn't replicate objects that are stored at rest using server-side encryption with KMS keys. To replicate Amazon Web Services KMS-encrypted objects, add the following: SourceSelectionCriteria, SseKmsEncryptedObjects, Status, EncryptionConfiguration, and ReplicaKmsKeyID. For information about replication configuration, see Replicating Objects Created with SSE Using KMS keys (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/replication-config-for-kms-objects.html). For information on PutBucketReplication errors, see List of replication-related error codes (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/ErrorResponses.html#ReplicationErrorCodeList) Permissions To create a PutBucketReplication request, you must have s3:PutReplicationConfiguration permissions for the bucket. By default, a resource owner, in this case the Amazon Web Services account that created the bucket, can perform this operation. The resource owner can also grant others permissions to perform the operation. For more information about permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/using-with-s3-actions.html) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html). To perform this operation, the user or role performing the action must have the iam:PassRole (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/IAM/latest/UserGuide/id_roles_use_passrole.html) permission. The following operations are related to PutBucketReplication:

* GetBucketReplication (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketReplication.html)

* DeleteBucketReplication (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketReplication.html)

func (*Client) PutBucketRequestPayment

func (c *Client) PutBucketRequestPayment(ctx context.Context, params *PutBucketRequestPaymentInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutBucketRequestPaymentOutput, error)

Sets the request payment configuration for a bucket. By default, the bucket owner pays for downloads from the bucket. This configuration parameter enables the bucket owner (only) to specify that the person requesting the download will be charged for the download. For more information, see Requester Pays Buckets (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/RequesterPaysBuckets.html). The following operations are related to PutBucketRequestPayment:

* CreateBucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateBucket.html)

* GetBucketRequestPayment (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketRequestPayment.html)

func (*Client) PutBucketTagging

func (c *Client) PutBucketTagging(ctx context.Context, params *PutBucketTaggingInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutBucketTaggingOutput, error)

Sets the tags for a bucket. Use tags to organize your Amazon Web Services bill to reflect your own cost structure. To do this, sign up to get your Amazon Web Services account bill with tag key values included. Then, to see the cost of combined resources, organize your billing information according to resources with the same tag key values. For example, you can tag several resources with a specific application name, and then organize your billing information to see the total cost of that application across several services. For more information, see Cost Allocation and Tagging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/awsaccountbilling/latest/aboutv2/cost-alloc-tags.html) and Using Cost Allocation in Amazon S3 Bucket Tags (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/CostAllocTagging.html). When this operation sets the tags for a bucket, it will overwrite any current tags the bucket already has. You cannot use this operation to add tags to an existing list of tags. To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:PutBucketTagging action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html). PutBucketTagging has the following special errors:

* Error code: InvalidTagError

* Description: The tag provided was not a valid tag. This error can occur if the tag did not pass input validation. For information about tag restrictions, see User-Defined Tag Restrictions (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/awsaccountbilling/latest/aboutv2/allocation-tag-restrictions.html) and Amazon Web Services-Generated Cost Allocation Tag Restrictions (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/awsaccountbilling/latest/aboutv2/aws-tag-restrictions.html).

* Error code: MalformedXMLError

* Description: The XML provided does not match the schema.

* Error code: OperationAbortedError

* Description: A conflicting conditional action is currently in progress against this resource. Please try again.

* Error code: InternalError

* Description: The service was unable to apply the provided tag to the bucket.

The following operations are related to PutBucketTagging:

* GetBucketTagging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketTagging.html)

* DeleteBucketTagging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucketTagging.html)

func (*Client) PutBucketVersioning

func (c *Client) PutBucketVersioning(ctx context.Context, params *PutBucketVersioningInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutBucketVersioningOutput, error)

Sets the versioning state of an existing bucket. You can set the versioning state with one of the following values: Enabled—Enables versioning for the objects in the bucket. All objects added to the bucket receive a unique version ID. Suspended—Disables versioning for the objects in the bucket. All objects added to the bucket receive the version ID null. If the versioning state has never been set on a bucket, it has no versioning state; a GetBucketVersioning (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketVersioning.html) request does not return a versioning state value. In order to enable MFA Delete, you must be the bucket owner. If you are the bucket owner and want to enable MFA Delete in the bucket versioning configuration, you must include the x-amz-mfa request header and the Status and the MfaDelete request elements in a request to set the versioning state of the bucket. If you have an object expiration lifecycle policy in your non-versioned bucket and you want to maintain the same permanent delete behavior when you enable versioning, you must add a noncurrent expiration policy. The noncurrent expiration lifecycle policy will manage the deletes of the noncurrent object versions in the version-enabled bucket. (A version-enabled bucket maintains one current and zero or more noncurrent object versions.) For more information, see Lifecycle and Versioning (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/object-lifecycle-mgmt.html#lifecycle-and-other-bucket-config). Related Resources

* CreateBucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateBucket.html)

* DeleteBucket (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteBucket.html)

* GetBucketVersioning (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketVersioning.html)

func (*Client) PutBucketWebsite

func (c *Client) PutBucketWebsite(ctx context.Context, params *PutBucketWebsiteInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutBucketWebsiteOutput, error)

Sets the configuration of the website that is specified in the website subresource. To configure a bucket as a website, you can add this subresource on the bucket with website configuration information such as the file name of the index document and any redirect rules. For more information, see Hosting Websites on Amazon S3 (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/WebsiteHosting.html). This PUT action requires the S3:PutBucketWebsite permission. By default, only the bucket owner can configure the website attached to a bucket; however, bucket owners can allow other users to set the website configuration by writing a bucket policy that grants them the S3:PutBucketWebsite permission. To redirect all website requests sent to the bucket's website endpoint, you add a website configuration with the following elements. Because all requests are sent to another website, you don't need to provide index document name for the bucket.

* WebsiteConfiguration

* RedirectAllRequestsTo

* HostName

* Protocol

If you want granular control over redirects, you can use the following elements to add routing rules that describe conditions for redirecting requests and information about the redirect destination. In this case, the website configuration must provide an index document for the bucket, because some requests might not be redirected.

* WebsiteConfiguration

* IndexDocument

* Suffix

* ErrorDocument

* Key

* RoutingRules

* RoutingRule

* Condition

* HttpErrorCodeReturnedEquals

* KeyPrefixEquals

* Redirect

* Protocol

* HostName

* ReplaceKeyPrefixWith

* ReplaceKeyWith

* HttpRedirectCode

Amazon S3 has a limitation of 50 routing rules per website configuration. If you require more than 50 routing rules, you can use object redirect. For more information, see Configuring an Object Redirect (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/how-to-page-redirect.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

func (*Client) PutObject

func (c *Client) PutObject(ctx context.Context, params *PutObjectInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutObjectOutput, error)

Adds an object to a bucket. You must have WRITE permissions on a bucket to add an object to it. Amazon S3 never adds partial objects; if you receive a success response, Amazon S3 added the entire object to the bucket. Amazon S3 is a distributed system. If it receives multiple write requests for the same object simultaneously, it overwrites all but the last object written. Amazon S3 does not provide object locking; if you need this, make sure to build it into your application layer or use versioning instead. To ensure that data is not corrupted traversing the network, use the Content-MD5 header. When you use this header, Amazon S3 checks the object against the provided MD5 value and, if they do not match, returns an error. Additionally, you can calculate the MD5 while putting an object to Amazon S3 and compare the returned ETag to the calculated MD5 value.

* To successfully complete the PutObject request, you must have the s3:PutObject in your IAM permissions.

* To successfully change the objects acl of your PutObject request, you must have the s3:PutObjectAcl in your IAM permissions.

* The Content-MD5 header is required for any request to upload an object with a retention period configured using Amazon S3 Object Lock. For more information about Amazon S3 Object Lock, see Amazon S3 Object Lock Overview (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/object-lock-overview.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Server-side Encryption You can optionally request server-side encryption. With server-side encryption, Amazon S3 encrypts your data as it writes it to disks in its data centers and decrypts the data when you access it. You have the option to provide your own encryption key or use Amazon Web Services managed encryption keys (SSE-S3 or SSE-KMS). For more information, see Using Server-Side Encryption (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/UsingServerSideEncryption.html). If you request server-side encryption using Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (SSE-KMS), you can enable an S3 Bucket Key at the object-level. For more information, see Amazon S3 Bucket Keys (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/bucket-key.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access Control List (ACL)-Specific Request Headers You can use headers to grant ACL- based permissions. By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access control. When adding a new object, you can grant permissions to individual Amazon Web Services accounts or to predefined groups defined by Amazon S3. These permissions are then added to the ACL on the object. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html) and Managing ACLs Using the REST API (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-using-rest-api.html). If the bucket that you're uploading objects to uses the bucket owner enforced setting for S3 Object Ownership, ACLs are disabled and no longer affect permissions. Buckets that use this setting only accept PUT requests that don't specify an ACL or PUT requests that specify bucket owner full control ACLs, such as the bucket-owner-full-control canned ACL or an equivalent form of this ACL expressed in the XML format. PUT requests that contain other ACLs (for example, custom grants to certain Amazon Web Services accounts) fail and return a 400 error with the error code AccessControlListNotSupported. For more information, see Controlling ownership of objects and disabling ACLs (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/about-object-ownership.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. If your bucket uses the bucket owner enforced setting for Object Ownership, all objects written to the bucket by any account will be owned by the bucket owner. Storage Class Options By default, Amazon S3 uses the STANDARD Storage Class to store newly created objects. The STANDARD storage class provides high durability and high availability. Depending on performance needs, you can specify a different Storage Class. Amazon S3 on Outposts only uses the OUTPOSTS Storage Class. For more information, see Storage Classes (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/storage-class-intro.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Versioning If you enable versioning for a bucket, Amazon S3 automatically generates a unique version ID for the object being stored. Amazon S3 returns this ID in the response. When you enable versioning for a bucket, if Amazon S3 receives multiple write requests for the same object simultaneously, it stores all of the objects. For more information about versioning, see Adding Objects to Versioning Enabled Buckets (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/AddingObjectstoVersioningEnabledBuckets.html). For information about returning the versioning state of a bucket, see GetBucketVersioning (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketVersioning.html). Related Resources

* CopyObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CopyObject.html)

* DeleteObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteObject.html)

func (*Client) PutObjectAcl

func (c *Client) PutObjectAcl(ctx context.Context, params *PutObjectAclInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutObjectAclOutput, error)

Uses the acl subresource to set the access control list (ACL) permissions for a new or existing object in an S3 bucket. You must have WRITE_ACP permission to set the ACL of an object. For more information, see What permissions can I grant? (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html#permissions) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts. Depending on your application needs, you can choose to set the ACL on an object using either the request body or the headers. For example, if you have an existing application that updates a bucket ACL using the request body, you can continue to use that approach. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. If your bucket uses the bucket owner enforced setting for S3 Object Ownership, ACLs are disabled and no longer affect permissions. You must use policies to grant access to your bucket and the objects in it. Requests to set ACLs or update ACLs fail and return the AccessControlListNotSupported error code. Requests to read ACLs are still supported. For more information, see Controlling object ownership (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/about-object-ownership.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access Permissions You can set access permissions using one of the following methods:

* Specify a canned ACL with the x-amz-acl request header. Amazon S3 supports a set of predefined ACLs, known as canned ACLs. Each canned ACL has a predefined set of grantees and permissions. Specify the canned ACL name as the value of x-amz-acl. If you use this header, you cannot use other access control-specific headers in your request. For more information, see Canned ACL (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html#CannedACL).

* Specify access permissions explicitly with the x-amz-grant-read, x-amz-grant-read-acp, x-amz-grant-write-acp, and x-amz-grant-full-control headers. When using these headers, you specify explicit access permissions and grantees (Amazon Web Services accounts or Amazon S3 groups) who will receive the permission. If you use these ACL-specific headers, you cannot use x-amz-acl header to set a canned ACL. These parameters map to the set of permissions that Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html). You specify each grantee as a type=value pair, where the type is one of the following:

* id – if the value specified is the canonical user ID of an Amazon Web Services account

* uri – if you are granting permissions to a predefined group

* emailAddress – if the value specified is the email address of an Amazon Web Services account Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:

* US East (N. Virginia)

* US West (N. California)

* US West (Oregon)

* Asia Pacific (Singapore)

* Asia Pacific (Sydney)

* Asia Pacific (Tokyo)

* Europe (Ireland)

* South America (São Paulo)

For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/general/latest/gr/rande.html#s3_region) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.

For example, the following x-amz-grant-read header grants list objects permission to the two Amazon Web Services accounts identified by their email addresses. x-amz-grant-read: emailAddress="xyz@amazon.com", emailAddress="abc@amazon.com"

You can use either a canned ACL or specify access permissions explicitly. You cannot do both. Grantee Values You can specify the person (grantee) to whom you're assigning access rights (using request elements) in the following ways:

* By the person's ID: <>ID<><>GranteesEmail<> DisplayName is optional and ignored in the request.

* By URI: <>http://acs.amazonaws.com/groups/global/AuthenticatedUsers<>

* By Email address: <>Grantees@email.com<>lt;/Grantee> The grantee is resolved to the CanonicalUser and, in a response to a GET Object acl request, appears as the CanonicalUser. Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:

* US East (N. Virginia)

* US West (N. California)

* US West (Oregon)

* Asia Pacific (Singapore)

* Asia Pacific (Sydney)

* Asia Pacific (Tokyo)

* Europe (Ireland)

* South America (São Paulo)

For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/general/latest/gr/rande.html#s3_region) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.

Versioning The ACL of an object is set at the object version level. By default, PUT sets the ACL of the current version of an object. To set the ACL of a different version, use the versionId subresource. Related Resources

* CopyObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CopyObject.html)

* GetObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObject.html)

func (*Client) PutObjectLegalHold

func (c *Client) PutObjectLegalHold(ctx context.Context, params *PutObjectLegalHoldInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutObjectLegalHoldOutput, error)

Applies a legal hold configuration to the specified object. For more information, see Locking Objects (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/object-lock.html). This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.

func (*Client) PutObjectLockConfiguration

func (c *Client) PutObjectLockConfiguration(ctx context.Context, params *PutObjectLockConfigurationInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutObjectLockConfigurationOutput, error)

Places an Object Lock configuration on the specified bucket. The rule specified in the Object Lock configuration will be applied by default to every new object placed in the specified bucket. For more information, see Locking Objects (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/object-lock.html).

* The DefaultRetention settings require both a mode and a period.

* The DefaultRetention period can be either Days or Years but you must select one. You cannot specify Days and Years at the same time.

* You can only enable Object Lock for new buckets. If you want to turn on Object Lock for an existing bucket, contact Amazon Web Services Support.

func (*Client) PutObjectRetention

func (c *Client) PutObjectRetention(ctx context.Context, params *PutObjectRetentionInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutObjectRetentionOutput, error)

Places an Object Retention configuration on an object. For more information, see Locking Objects (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/object-lock.html). Users or accounts require the s3:PutObjectRetention permission in order to place an Object Retention configuration on objects. Bypassing a Governance Retention configuration requires the s3:BypassGovernanceRetention permission. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.

func (*Client) PutObjectTagging

func (c *Client) PutObjectTagging(ctx context.Context, params *PutObjectTaggingInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutObjectTaggingOutput, error)

Sets the supplied tag-set to an object that already exists in a bucket. A tag is a key-value pair. You can associate tags with an object by sending a PUT request against the tagging subresource that is associated with the object. You can retrieve tags by sending a GET request. For more information, see GetObjectTagging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObjectTagging.html). For tagging-related restrictions related to characters and encodings, see Tag Restrictions (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/awsaccountbilling/latest/aboutv2/allocation-tag-restrictions.html). Note that Amazon S3 limits the maximum number of tags to 10 tags per object. To use this operation, you must have permission to perform the s3:PutObjectTagging action. By default, the bucket owner has this permission and can grant this permission to others. To put tags of any other version, use the versionId query parameter. You also need permission for the s3:PutObjectVersionTagging action. For information about the Amazon S3 object tagging feature, see Object Tagging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/object-tagging.html). Special Errors

* Code: InvalidTagError

* Cause: The tag provided was not a valid tag. This error can occur if the tag did not pass input validation. For more information, see Object Tagging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/object-tagging.html).

* Code: MalformedXMLError

* Cause: The XML provided does not match the schema.

* Code: OperationAbortedError

* Cause: A conflicting conditional action is currently in progress against this resource. Please try again.

* Code: InternalError

* Cause: The service was unable to apply the provided tag to the object.

Related Resources

* GetObjectTagging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObjectTagging.html)

* DeleteObjectTagging (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeleteObjectTagging.html)

func (*Client) PutPublicAccessBlock

func (c *Client) PutPublicAccessBlock(ctx context.Context, params *PutPublicAccessBlockInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*PutPublicAccessBlockOutput, error)

Creates or modifies the PublicAccessBlock configuration for an Amazon S3 bucket. To use this operation, you must have the s3:PutBucketPublicAccessBlock permission. For more information about Amazon S3 permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/using-with-s3-actions.html). When Amazon S3 evaluates the PublicAccessBlock configuration for a bucket or an object, it checks the PublicAccessBlock configuration for both the bucket (or the bucket that contains the object) and the bucket owner's account. If the PublicAccessBlock configurations are different between the bucket and the account, Amazon S3 uses the most restrictive combination of the bucket-level and account-level settings. For more information about when Amazon S3 considers a bucket or an object public, see The Meaning of "Public" (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/access-control-block-public-access.html#access-control-block-public-access-policy-status). Related Resources

* GetPublicAccessBlock (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetPublicAccessBlock.html)

* DeletePublicAccessBlock (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_DeletePublicAccessBlock.html)

* GetBucketPolicyStatus (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketPolicyStatus.html)

* Using Amazon S3 Block Public Access (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/access-control-block-public-access.html)

func (*Client) RestoreObject

func (c *Client) RestoreObject(ctx context.Context, params *RestoreObjectInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*RestoreObjectOutput, error)

Restores an archived copy of an object back into Amazon S3 This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts. This action performs the following types of requests:

* select - Perform a select query on an archived object

* restore an archive - Restore an archived object

To use this operation, you must have permissions to perform the s3:RestoreObject action. The bucket owner has this permission by default and can grant this permission to others. For more information about permissions, see Permissions Related to Bucket Subresource Operations (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-with-s3-actions.html#using-with-s3-actions-related-to-bucket-subresources) and Managing Access Permissions to Your Amazon S3 Resources (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-access-control.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Querying Archives with Select Requests You use a select type of request to perform SQL queries on archived objects. The archived objects that are being queried by the select request must be formatted as uncompressed comma-separated values (CSV) files. You can run queries and custom analytics on your archived data without having to restore your data to a hotter Amazon S3 tier. For an overview about select requests, see Querying Archived Objects (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/querying-glacier-archives.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When making a select request, do the following:

* Define an output location for the select query's output. This must be an Amazon S3 bucket in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the bucket that contains the archive object that is being queried. The Amazon Web Services account that initiates the job must have permissions to write to the S3 bucket. You can specify the storage class and encryption for the output objects stored in the bucket. For more information about output, see Querying Archived Objects (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/querying-glacier-archives.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For more information about the S3 structure in the request body, see the following:

* PutObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutObject.html)

* Managing Access with ACLs (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/S3_ACLs_UsingACLs.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide

* Protecting Data Using Server-Side Encryption (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/serv-side-encryption.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide

* Define the SQL expression for the SELECT type of restoration for your query in the request body's SelectParameters structure. You can use expressions like the following examples.

* The following expression returns all records from the specified object. SELECT * FROM Object

* Assuming that you are not using any headers for data stored in the object, you can specify columns with positional headers. SELECT s._1, s._2 FROM Object s WHERE s._3 > 100

* If you have headers and you set the fileHeaderInfo in the CSV structure in the request body to USE, you can specify headers in the query. (If you set the fileHeaderInfo field to IGNORE, the first row is skipped for the query.) You cannot mix ordinal positions with header column names. SELECT s.Id, s.FirstName, s.SSN FROM S3Object s

For more information about using SQL with S3 Glacier Select restore, see SQL Reference for Amazon S3 Select and S3 Glacier Select (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/s3-glacier-select-sql-reference.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When making a select request, you can also do the following:

* To expedite your queries, specify the Expedited tier. For more information about tiers, see "Restoring Archives," later in this topic.

* Specify details about the data serialization format of both the input object that is being queried and the serialization of the CSV-encoded query results.

The following are additional important facts about the select feature:

* The output results are new Amazon S3 objects. Unlike archive retrievals, they are stored until explicitly deleted-manually or through a lifecycle policy.

* You can issue more than one select request on the same Amazon S3 object. Amazon S3 doesn't deduplicate requests, so avoid issuing duplicate requests.

* Amazon S3 accepts a select request even if the object has already been restored. A select request doesn’t return error response 409.

Restoring objects Objects that you archive to the S3 Glacier or S3 Glacier Deep Archive storage class, and S3 Intelligent-Tiering Archive or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Deep Archive tiers are not accessible in real time. For objects in Archive Access or Deep Archive Access tiers you must first initiate a restore request, and then wait until the object is moved into the Frequent Access tier. For objects in S3 Glacier or S3 Glacier Deep Archive storage classes you must first initiate a restore request, and then wait until a temporary copy of the object is available. To access an archived object, you must restore the object for the duration (number of days) that you specify. To restore a specific object version, you can provide a version ID. If you don't provide a version ID, Amazon S3 restores the current version. When restoring an archived object (or using a select request), you can specify one of the following data access tier options in the Tier element of the request body:

* Expedited - Expedited retrievals allow you to quickly access your data stored in the S3 Glacier storage class or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Archive tier when occasional urgent requests for a subset of archives are required. For all but the largest archived objects (250 MB+), data accessed using Expedited retrievals is typically made available within 1–5 minutes. Provisioned capacity ensures that retrieval capacity for Expedited retrievals is available when you need it. Expedited retrievals and provisioned capacity are not available for objects stored in the S3 Glacier Deep Archive storage class or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Deep Archive tier.

* Standard - Standard retrievals allow you to access any of your archived objects within several hours. This is the default option for retrieval requests that do not specify the retrieval option. Standard retrievals typically finish within 3–5 hours for objects stored in the S3 Glacier storage class or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Archive tier. They typically finish within 12 hours for objects stored in the S3 Glacier Deep Archive storage class or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Deep Archive tier. Standard retrievals are free for objects stored in S3 Intelligent-Tiering.

* Bulk - Bulk retrievals are the lowest-cost retrieval option in S3 Glacier, enabling you to retrieve large amounts, even petabytes, of data inexpensively. Bulk retrievals typically finish within 5–12 hours for objects stored in the S3 Glacier storage class or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Archive tier. They typically finish within 48 hours for objects stored in the S3 Glacier Deep Archive storage class or S3 Intelligent-Tiering Deep Archive tier. Bulk retrievals are free for objects stored in S3 Intelligent-Tiering.

For more information about archive retrieval options and provisioned capacity for Expedited data access, see Restoring Archived Objects (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/restoring-objects.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. You can use Amazon S3 restore speed upgrade to change the restore speed to a faster speed while it is in progress. For more information, see Upgrading the speed of an in-progress restore (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/restoring-objects.html#restoring-objects-upgrade-tier.title.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. To get the status of object restoration, you can send a HEAD request. Operations return the x-amz-restore header, which provides information about the restoration status, in the response. You can use Amazon S3 event notifications to notify you when a restore is initiated or completed. For more information, see Configuring Amazon S3 Event Notifications (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/NotificationHowTo.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. After restoring an archived object, you can update the restoration period by reissuing the request with a new period. Amazon S3 updates the restoration period relative to the current time and charges only for the request-there are no data transfer charges. You cannot update the restoration period when Amazon S3 is actively processing your current restore request for the object. If your bucket has a lifecycle configuration with a rule that includes an expiration action, the object expiration overrides the life span that you specify in a restore request. For example, if you restore an object copy for 10 days, but the object is scheduled to expire in 3 days, Amazon S3 deletes the object in 3 days. For more information about lifecycle configuration, see PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration.html) and Object Lifecycle Management (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/object-lifecycle-mgmt.html) in Amazon S3 User Guide. Responses A successful action returns either the 200 OK or 202 Accepted status code.

* If the object is not previously restored, then Amazon S3 returns 202 Accepted in the response.

* If the object is previously restored, Amazon S3 returns 200 OK in the response.

Special Errors

* Code: RestoreAlreadyInProgress

* Cause: Object restore is already in progress. (This error does not apply to SELECT type requests.)

* HTTP Status Code: 409 Conflict

* SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client

* Code: GlacierExpeditedRetrievalNotAvailable

* Cause: expedited retrievals are currently not available. Try again later. (Returned if there is insufficient capacity to process the Expedited request. This error applies only to Expedited retrievals and not to S3 Standard or Bulk retrievals.)

* HTTP Status Code: 503

* SOAP Fault Code Prefix: N/A

* PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration.html)

* GetBucketNotificationConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketNotificationConfiguration.html)

* SQL Reference for Amazon S3 Select and S3 Glacier Select (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/s3-glacier-select-sql-reference.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide

func (*Client) SelectObjectContent added in v1.18.0

func (c *Client) SelectObjectContent(ctx context.Context, params *SelectObjectContentInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*SelectObjectContentOutput, error)

This action filters the contents of an Amazon S3 object based on a simple structured query language (SQL) statement. In the request, along with the SQL expression, you must also specify a data serialization format (JSON, CSV, or Apache Parquet) of the object. Amazon S3 uses this format to parse object data into records, and returns only records that match the specified SQL expression. You must also specify the data serialization format for the response. This action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts. For more information about Amazon S3 Select, see Selecting Content from Objects (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/selecting-content-from-objects.html) and SELECT Command (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/s3-glacier-select-sql-reference-select.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For more information about using SQL with Amazon S3 Select, see SQL Reference for Amazon S3 Select and S3 Glacier Select (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/s3-glacier-select-sql-reference.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Permissions You must have s3:GetObject permission for this operation. Amazon S3 Select does not support anonymous access. For more information about permissions, see Specifying Permissions in a Policy (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/using-with-s3-actions.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Object Data Formats You can use Amazon S3 Select to query objects that have the following format properties:

* CSV, JSON, and Parquet - Objects must be in CSV, JSON, or Parquet format.

* UTF-8 - UTF-8 is the only encoding type Amazon S3 Select supports.

* GZIP or BZIP2 - CSV and JSON files can be compressed using GZIP or BZIP2. GZIP and BZIP2 are the only compression formats that Amazon S3 Select supports for CSV and JSON files. Amazon S3 Select supports columnar compression for Parquet using GZIP or Snappy. Amazon S3 Select does not support whole-object compression for Parquet objects.

* Server-side encryption - Amazon S3 Select supports querying objects that are protected with server-side encryption. For objects that are encrypted with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C), you must use HTTPS, and you must use the headers that are documented in the GetObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObject.html). For more information about SSE-C, see Server-Side Encryption (Using Customer-Provided Encryption Keys) (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ServerSideEncryptionCustomerKeys.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For objects that are encrypted with Amazon S3 managed encryption keys (SSE-S3) and Amazon Web Services KMS keys (SSE-KMS), server-side encryption is handled transparently, so you don't need to specify anything. For more information about server-side encryption, including SSE-S3 and SSE-KMS, see Protecting Data Using Server-Side Encryption (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/serv-side-encryption.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Working with the Response Body Given the response size is unknown, Amazon S3 Select streams the response as a series of messages and includes a Transfer-Encoding header with chunked as its value in the response. For more information, see Appendix: SelectObjectContent Response (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/RESTSelectObjectAppendix.html). GetObject Support The SelectObjectContent action does not support the following GetObject functionality. For more information, see GetObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObject.html).

* Range: Although you can specify a scan range for an Amazon S3 Select request (see SelectObjectContentRequest - ScanRange (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_SelectObjectContent.html#AmazonS3-SelectObjectContent-request-ScanRange) in the request parameters), you cannot specify the range of bytes of an object to return.

* GLACIER, DEEP_ARCHIVE and REDUCED_REDUNDANCY storage classes: You cannot specify the GLACIER, DEEP_ARCHIVE, or REDUCED_REDUNDANCY storage classes. For more information, about storage classes see Storage Classes (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/UsingMetadata.html#storage-class-intro) in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Special Errors For a list of special errors for this operation, see List of SELECT Object Content Error Codes (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/ErrorResponses.html#SelectObjectContentErrorCodeList) Related Resources

* GetObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObject.html)

* GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration.html)

* PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_PutBucketLifecycleConfiguration.html)

func (*Client) UploadPart

func (c *Client) UploadPart(ctx context.Context, params *UploadPartInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*UploadPartOutput, error)

Uploads a part in a multipart upload. In this operation, you provide part data in your request. However, you have an option to specify your existing Amazon S3 object as a data source for the part you are uploading. To upload a part from an existing object, you use the UploadPartCopy (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_UploadPartCopy.html) operation. You must initiate a multipart upload (see CreateMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateMultipartUpload.html)) before you can upload any part. In response to your initiate request, Amazon S3 returns an upload ID, a unique identifier, that you must include in your upload part request. Part numbers can be any number from 1 to 10,000, inclusive. A part number uniquely identifies a part and also defines its position within the object being created. If you upload a new part using the same part number that was used with a previous part, the previously uploaded part is overwritten. For information about maximum and minimum part sizes and other multipart upload specifications, see Multipart upload limits (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/qfacts.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. To ensure that data is not corrupted when traversing the network, specify the Content-MD5 header in the upload part request. Amazon S3 checks the part data against the provided MD5 value. If they do not match, Amazon S3 returns an error. If the upload request is signed with Signature Version 4, then Amazon Web Services S3 uses the x-amz-content-sha256 header as a checksum instead of Content-MD5. For more information see Authenticating Requests: Using the Authorization Header (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/sigv4-auth-using-authorization-header.html). Note: After you initiate multipart upload and upload one or more parts, you must either complete or abort multipart upload in order to stop getting charged for storage of the uploaded parts. Only after you either complete or abort multipart upload, Amazon S3 frees up the parts storage and stops charging you for the parts storage. For more information on multipart uploads, go to Multipart Upload Overview (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/mpuoverview.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide . For information on the permissions required to use the multipart upload API, go to Multipart Upload and Permissions (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/mpuAndPermissions.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. You can optionally request server-side encryption where Amazon S3 encrypts your data as it writes it to disks in its data centers and decrypts it for you when you access it. You have the option of providing your own encryption key, or you can use the Amazon Web Services managed encryption keys. If you choose to provide your own encryption key, the request headers you provide in the request must match the headers you used in the request to initiate the upload by using CreateMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateMultipartUpload.html). For more information, go to Using Server-Side Encryption (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/UsingServerSideEncryption.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Server-side encryption is supported by the S3 Multipart Upload actions. Unless you are using a customer-provided encryption key, you don't need to specify the encryption parameters in each UploadPart request. Instead, you only need to specify the server-side encryption parameters in the initial Initiate Multipart request. For more information, see CreateMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateMultipartUpload.html). If you requested server-side encryption using a customer-provided encryption key in your initiate multipart upload request, you must provide identical encryption information in each part upload using the following headers.

* x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm

* x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key

* x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key-MD5

Special Errors

* Code: NoSuchUpload

* Cause: The specified multipart upload does not exist. The upload ID might be invalid, or the multipart upload might have been aborted or completed.

* HTTP Status Code: 404 Not Found

* SOAP Fault Code Prefix: Client

* CreateMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateMultipartUpload.html)

* CompleteMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CompleteMultipartUpload.html)

* AbortMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_AbortMultipartUpload.html)

* ListParts (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListParts.html)

* ListMultipartUploads (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListMultipartUploads.html)

func (*Client) UploadPartCopy

func (c *Client) UploadPartCopy(ctx context.Context, params *UploadPartCopyInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*UploadPartCopyOutput, error)

Uploads a part by copying data from an existing object as data source. You specify the data source by adding the request header x-amz-copy-source in your request and a byte range by adding the request header x-amz-copy-source-range in your request. For information about maximum and minimum part sizes and other multipart upload specifications, see Multipart upload limits (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/qfacts.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Instead of using an existing object as part data, you might use the UploadPart (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_UploadPart.html) action and provide data in your request. You must initiate a multipart upload before you can upload any part. In response to your initiate request. Amazon S3 returns a unique identifier, the upload ID, that you must include in your upload part request. For more information about using the UploadPartCopy operation, see the following:

* For conceptual information about multipart uploads, see Uploading Objects Using Multipart Upload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/uploadobjusingmpu.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

* For information about permissions required to use the multipart upload API, see Multipart Upload and Permissions (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/mpuAndPermissions.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

* For information about copying objects using a single atomic action vs. a multipart upload, see Operations on Objects (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ObjectOperations.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

* For information about using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys with the UploadPartCopy operation, see CopyObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CopyObject.html) and UploadPart (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_UploadPart.html).

Note the following additional considerations about the request headers x-amz-copy-source-if-match, x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match, x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since, and x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since:

* Consideration 1 - If both of the x-amz-copy-source-if-match and x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since headers are present in the request as follows: x-amz-copy-source-if-match condition evaluates to true, and; x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since condition evaluates to false; Amazon S3 returns 200 OK and copies the data.

* Consideration 2 - If both of the x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match and x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since headers are present in the request as follows: x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match condition evaluates to false, and; x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since condition evaluates to true; Amazon S3 returns 412 Precondition Failed response code.

Versioning If your bucket has versioning enabled, you could have multiple versions of the same object. By default, x-amz-copy-source identifies the current version of the object to copy. If the current version is a delete marker and you don't specify a versionId in the x-amz-copy-source, Amazon S3 returns a 404 error, because the object does not exist. If you specify versionId in the x-amz-copy-source and the versionId is a delete marker, Amazon S3 returns an HTTP 400 error, because you are not allowed to specify a delete marker as a version for the x-amz-copy-source. You can optionally specify a specific version of the source object to copy by adding the versionId subresource as shown in the following example: x-amz-copy-source: /bucket/object?versionId=version id Special Errors

* Code: NoSuchUpload

* Cause: The specified multipart upload does not exist. The upload ID might be invalid, or the multipart upload might have been aborted or completed.

* HTTP Status Code: 404 Not Found

* Code: InvalidRequest

* Cause: The specified copy source is not supported as a byte-range copy source.

* HTTP Status Code: 400 Bad Request

* CreateMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CreateMultipartUpload.html)

* UploadPart (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_UploadPart.html)

* CompleteMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_CompleteMultipartUpload.html)

* AbortMultipartUpload (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_AbortMultipartUpload.html)

* ListParts (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListParts.html)

* ListMultipartUploads (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_ListMultipartUploads.html)

func (*Client) WriteGetObjectResponse added in v1.3.0

func (c *Client) WriteGetObjectResponse(ctx context.Context, params *WriteGetObjectResponseInput, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*WriteGetObjectResponseOutput, error)

Passes transformed objects to a GetObject operation when using Object Lambda access points. For information about Object Lambda access points, see Transforming objects with Object Lambda access points (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/transforming-objects.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This operation supports metadata that can be returned by GetObject (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_GetObject.html), in addition to RequestRoute, RequestToken, StatusCode, ErrorCode, and ErrorMessage. The GetObject response metadata is supported so that the WriteGetObjectResponse caller, typically an Lambda function, can provide the same metadata when it internally invokes GetObject. When WriteGetObjectResponse is called by a customer-owned Lambda function, the metadata returned to the end user GetObject call might differ from what Amazon S3 would normally return. You can include any number of metadata headers. When including a metadata header, it should be prefaced with x-amz-meta. For example, x-amz-meta-my-custom-header: MyCustomValue. The primary use case for this is to forward GetObject metadata. Amazon Web Services provides some prebuilt Lambda functions that you can use with S3 Object Lambda to detect and redact personally identifiable information (PII) and decompress S3 objects. These Lambda functions are available in the Amazon Web Services Serverless Application Repository, and can be selected through the Amazon Web Services Management Console when you create your Object Lambda access point. Example 1: PII Access Control - This Lambda function uses Amazon Comprehend, a natural language processing (NLP) service using machine learning to find insights and relationships in text. It automatically detects personally identifiable information (PII) such as names, addresses, dates, credit card numbers, and social security numbers from documents in your Amazon S3 bucket. Example 2: PII Redaction - This Lambda function uses Amazon Comprehend, a natural language processing (NLP) service using machine learning to find insights and relationships in text. It automatically redacts personally identifiable information (PII) such as names, addresses, dates, credit card numbers, and social security numbers from documents in your Amazon S3 bucket. Example 3: Decompression - The Lambda function S3ObjectLambdaDecompression, is equipped to decompress objects stored in S3 in one of six compressed file formats including bzip2, gzip, snappy, zlib, zstandard and ZIP. For information on how to view and use these functions, see Using Amazon Web Services built Lambda functions (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/olap-examples.html) in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

type CompleteMultipartUploadInput

type CompleteMultipartUploadInput struct {

	// Name of the bucket to which the multipart upload was initiated. When using this
	// action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point
	// hostname. The access point hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts,
	// you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
	// hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using
	// this action with S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you
	// provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more
	// information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/S3onOutposts.html) in the
	// Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// Object key for which the multipart upload was initiated.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Key *string

	// ID for the initiated multipart upload.
	//
	// This member is required.
	UploadId *string

	// This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data
	// received is the same data that was originally sent. This header specifies the
	// base64-encoded, 32-bit CRC32 checksum of the object. For more information, see
	// Checking object integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	ChecksumCRC32 *string

	// This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data
	// received is the same data that was originally sent. This header specifies the
	// base64-encoded, 32-bit CRC32C checksum of the object. For more information, see
	// Checking object integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	ChecksumCRC32C *string

	// This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data
	// received is the same data that was originally sent. This header specifies the
	// base64-encoded, 160-bit SHA-1 digest of the object. For more information, see
	// Checking object integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	ChecksumSHA1 *string

	// This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data
	// received is the same data that was originally sent. This header specifies the
	// base64-encoded, 256-bit SHA-256 digest of the object. For more information, see
	// Checking object integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	ChecksumSHA256 *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// The container for the multipart upload request information.
	MultipartUpload *types.CompletedMultipartUpload

	// Confirms that the requester knows that they will be charged for the request.
	// Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests. For information
	// about downloading objects from Requester Pays buckets, see Downloading Objects
	// in Requester Pays Buckets
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ObjectsinRequesterPaysBuckets.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	RequestPayer types.RequestPayer

	// The server-side encryption (SSE) algorithm used to encrypt the object. This
	// parameter is needed only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm.
	// For more information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ServerSideEncryptionCustomerKeys.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	SSECustomerAlgorithm *string

	// The server-side encryption (SSE) customer managed key. This parameter is needed
	// only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm. For more
	// information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ServerSideEncryptionCustomerKeys.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	SSECustomerKey *string

	// The MD5 server-side encryption (SSE) customer managed key. This parameter is
	// needed only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm. For more
	// information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ServerSideEncryptionCustomerKeys.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	SSECustomerKeyMD5 *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type CompleteMultipartUploadOutput

type CompleteMultipartUploadOutput struct {

	// The name of the bucket that contains the newly created object. Does not return
	// the access point ARN or access point alias if used. When using this action with
	// an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The
	// access point hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts,
	// you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
	// hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using
	// this action with S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you
	// provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more
	// information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/S3onOutposts.html) in the
	// Amazon S3 User Guide.
	Bucket *string

	// Indicates whether the multipart upload uses an S3 Bucket Key for server-side
	// encryption with Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS).
	BucketKeyEnabled bool

	// The base64-encoded, 32-bit CRC32 checksum of the object. This will only be
	// present if it was uploaded with the object. With multipart uploads, this may not
	// be a checksum value of the object. For more information about how checksums are
	// calculated with multipart uploads, see  Checking object integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html#large-object-checksums)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	ChecksumCRC32 *string

	// The base64-encoded, 32-bit CRC32C checksum of the object. This will only be
	// present if it was uploaded with the object. With multipart uploads, this may not
	// be a checksum value of the object. For more information about how checksums are
	// calculated with multipart uploads, see  Checking object integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html#large-object-checksums)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	ChecksumCRC32C *string

	// The base64-encoded, 160-bit SHA-1 digest of the object. This will only be
	// present if it was uploaded with the object. With multipart uploads, this may not
	// be a checksum value of the object. For more information about how checksums are
	// calculated with multipart uploads, see  Checking object integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html#large-object-checksums)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	ChecksumSHA1 *string

	// The base64-encoded, 256-bit SHA-256 digest of the object. This will only be
	// present if it was uploaded with the object. With multipart uploads, this may not
	// be a checksum value of the object. For more information about how checksums are
	// calculated with multipart uploads, see  Checking object integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html#large-object-checksums)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	ChecksumSHA256 *string

	// Entity tag that identifies the newly created object's data. Objects with
	// different object data will have different entity tags. The entity tag is an
	// opaque string. The entity tag may or may not be an MD5 digest of the object
	// data. If the entity tag is not an MD5 digest of the object data, it will contain
	// one or more nonhexadecimal characters and/or will consist of less than 32 or
	// more than 32 hexadecimal digits. For more information about how the entity tag
	// is calculated, see Checking object integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	ETag *string

	// If the object expiration is configured, this will contain the expiration date
	// (expiry-date) and rule ID (rule-id). The value of rule-id is URL-encoded.
	Expiration *string

	// The object key of the newly created object.
	Key *string

	// The URI that identifies the newly created object.
	Location *string

	// If present, indicates that the requester was successfully charged for the
	// request.
	RequestCharged types.RequestCharged

	// If present, specifies the ID of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service
	// (Amazon Web Services KMS) symmetric customer managed key that was used for the
	// object.
	SSEKMSKeyId *string

	// If you specified server-side encryption either with an Amazon S3-managed
	// encryption key or an Amazon Web Services KMS key in your initiate multipart
	// upload request, the response includes this header. It confirms the encryption
	// algorithm that Amazon S3 used to encrypt the object.
	ServerSideEncryption types.ServerSideEncryption

	// Version ID of the newly created object, in case the bucket has versioning turned
	// on.
	VersionId *string

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ComputedInputChecksumsMetadata added in v1.25.0

type ComputedInputChecksumsMetadata struct {
	// ComputedChecksums is a map of algorithm name to checksum value of the computed
	// input payload's checksums.
	ComputedChecksums map[string]string
}

ComputedInputChecksumsMetadata provides information about the algorithms used to compute the checksum(s) of the input payload.

func GetComputedInputChecksumsMetadata added in v1.25.0

func GetComputedInputChecksumsMetadata(m middleware.Metadata) (ComputedInputChecksumsMetadata, bool)

GetComputedInputChecksumsMetadata retrieves from the result metadata the map of algorithms and input payload checksums values.

type CopyObjectInput

type CopyObjectInput struct {

	// The name of the destination bucket. When using this action with an access point,
	// you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname
	// takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com.
	// When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services
	// SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more
	// information about access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts,
	// you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
	// hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using
	// this action with S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you
	// provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more
	// information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/S3onOutposts.html) in the
	// Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// Specifies the source object for the copy operation. You specify the value in one
	// of two formats, depending on whether you want to access the source object
	// through an access point
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/access-points.html):
	//
	// *
	// For objects not accessed through an access point, specify the name of the source
	// bucket and the key of the source object, separated by a slash (/). For example,
	// to copy the object reports/january.pdf from the bucket awsexamplebucket, use
	// awsexamplebucket/reports/january.pdf. The value must be URL-encoded.
	//
	// * For
	// objects accessed through access points, specify the Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
	// of the object as accessed through the access point, in the format
	// arn:aws:s3:::accesspoint//object/. For example, to copy the object
	// reports/january.pdf through access point my-access-point owned by account
	// 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of
	// arn:aws:s3:us-west-2:123456789012:accesspoint/my-access-point/object/reports/january.pdf.
	// The value must be URL encoded. Amazon S3 supports copy operations using access
	// points only when the source and destination buckets are in the same Amazon Web
	// Services Region. Alternatively, for objects accessed through Amazon S3 on
	// Outposts, specify the ARN of the object as accessed in the format
	// arn:aws:s3-outposts:::outpost//object/. For example, to copy the object
	// reports/january.pdf through outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in
	// Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of
	// arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/object/reports/january.pdf.
	// The value must be URL-encoded.
	//
	// To copy a specific version of an object, append
	// ?versionId= to the value (for example,
	// awsexamplebucket/reports/january.pdf?versionId=QUpfdndhfd8438MNFDN93jdnJFkdmqnh893).
	// If you don't specify a version ID, Amazon S3 copies the latest version of the
	// source object.
	//
	// This member is required.
	CopySource *string

	// The key of the destination object.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Key *string

	// The canned ACL to apply to the object. This action is not supported by Amazon S3
	// on Outposts.
	ACL types.ObjectCannedACL

	// Specifies whether Amazon S3 should use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption
	// with server-side encryption using AWS KMS (SSE-KMS). Setting this header to true
	// causes Amazon S3 to use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption with SSE-KMS.
	// Specifying this header with a COPY action doesn’t affect bucket-level settings
	// for S3 Bucket Key.
	BucketKeyEnabled bool

	// Specifies caching behavior along the request/reply chain.
	CacheControl *string

	// Indicates the algorithm you want Amazon S3 to use to create the checksum for the
	// object. For more information, see Checking object integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	ChecksumAlgorithm types.ChecksumAlgorithm

	// Specifies presentational information for the object.
	ContentDisposition *string

	// Specifies what content encodings have been applied to the object and thus what
	// decoding mechanisms must be applied to obtain the media-type referenced by the
	// Content-Type header field.
	ContentEncoding *string

	// The language the content is in.
	ContentLanguage *string

	// A standard MIME type describing the format of the object data.
	ContentType *string

	// Copies the object if its entity tag (ETag) matches the specified tag.
	CopySourceIfMatch *string

	// Copies the object if it has been modified since the specified time.
	CopySourceIfModifiedSince *time.Time

	// Copies the object if its entity tag (ETag) is different than the specified ETag.
	CopySourceIfNoneMatch *string

	// Copies the object if it hasn't been modified since the specified time.
	CopySourceIfUnmodifiedSince *time.Time

	// Specifies the algorithm to use when decrypting the source object (for example,
	// AES256).
	CopySourceSSECustomerAlgorithm *string

	// Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use to decrypt
	// the source object. The encryption key provided in this header must be one that
	// was used when the source object was created.
	CopySourceSSECustomerKey *string

	// Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321.
	// Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the
	// encryption key was transmitted without error.
	CopySourceSSECustomerKeyMD5 *string

	// The account ID of the expected destination bucket owner. If the destination
	// bucket is owned by a different account, the request fails with the HTTP status
	// code 403 Forbidden (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// The account ID of the expected source bucket owner. If the source bucket is
	// owned by a different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403
	// Forbidden (access denied).
	ExpectedSourceBucketOwner *string

	// The date and time at which the object is no longer cacheable.
	Expires *time.Time

	// Gives the grantee READ, READ_ACP, and WRITE_ACP permissions on the object. This
	// action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
	GrantFullControl *string

	// Allows grantee to read the object data and its metadata. This action is not
	// supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
	GrantRead *string

	// Allows grantee to read the object ACL. This action is not supported by Amazon S3
	// on Outposts.
	GrantReadACP *string

	// Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable object. This action is not
	// supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
	GrantWriteACP *string

	// A map of metadata to store with the object in S3.
	Metadata map[string]string

	// Specifies whether the metadata is copied from the source object or replaced with
	// metadata provided in the request.
	MetadataDirective types.MetadataDirective

	// Specifies whether you want to apply a legal hold to the copied object.
	ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus types.ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus

	// The Object Lock mode that you want to apply to the copied object.
	ObjectLockMode types.ObjectLockMode

	// The date and time when you want the copied object's Object Lock to expire.
	ObjectLockRetainUntilDate *time.Time

	// Confirms that the requester knows that they will be charged for the request.
	// Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests. For information
	// about downloading objects from Requester Pays buckets, see Downloading Objects
	// in Requester Pays Buckets
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ObjectsinRequesterPaysBuckets.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	RequestPayer types.RequestPayer

	// Specifies the algorithm to use to when encrypting the object (for example,
	// AES256).
	SSECustomerAlgorithm *string

	// Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in
	// encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is
	// discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be
	// appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the
	// x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm header.
	SSECustomerKey *string

	// Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321.
	// Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the
	// encryption key was transmitted without error.
	SSECustomerKeyMD5 *string

	// Specifies the Amazon Web Services KMS Encryption Context to use for object
	// encryption. The value of this header is a base64-encoded UTF-8 string holding
	// JSON with the encryption context key-value pairs.
	SSEKMSEncryptionContext *string

	// Specifies the Amazon Web Services KMS key ID to use for object encryption. All
	// GET and PUT requests for an object protected by Amazon Web Services KMS will
	// fail if not made via SSL or using SigV4. For information about configuring using
	// any of the officially supported Amazon Web Services SDKs and Amazon Web Services
	// CLI, see Specifying the Signature Version in Request Authentication
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/UsingAWSSDK.html#specify-signature-version)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	SSEKMSKeyId *string

	// The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in Amazon S3
	// (for example, AES256, aws:kms).
	ServerSideEncryption types.ServerSideEncryption

	// By default, Amazon S3 uses the STANDARD Storage Class to store newly created
	// objects. The STANDARD storage class provides high durability and high
	// availability. Depending on performance needs, you can specify a different
	// Storage Class. Amazon S3 on Outposts only uses the OUTPOSTS Storage Class. For
	// more information, see Storage Classes
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/storage-class-intro.html) in
	// the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	StorageClass types.StorageClass

	// The tag-set for the object destination object this value must be used in
	// conjunction with the TaggingDirective. The tag-set must be encoded as URL Query
	// parameters.
	Tagging *string

	// Specifies whether the object tag-set are copied from the source object or
	// replaced with tag-set provided in the request.
	TaggingDirective types.TaggingDirective

	// If the bucket is configured as a website, redirects requests for this object to
	// another object in the same bucket or to an external URL. Amazon S3 stores the
	// value of this header in the object metadata.
	WebsiteRedirectLocation *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type CopyObjectOutput

type CopyObjectOutput struct {

	// Indicates whether the copied object uses an S3 Bucket Key for server-side
	// encryption with Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS).
	BucketKeyEnabled bool

	// Container for all response elements.
	CopyObjectResult *types.CopyObjectResult

	// Version of the copied object in the destination bucket.
	CopySourceVersionId *string

	// If the object expiration is configured, the response includes this header.
	Expiration *string

	// If present, indicates that the requester was successfully charged for the
	// request.
	RequestCharged types.RequestCharged

	// If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested,
	// the response will include this header confirming the encryption algorithm used.
	SSECustomerAlgorithm *string

	// If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested,
	// the response will include this header to provide round-trip message integrity
	// verification of the customer-provided encryption key.
	SSECustomerKeyMD5 *string

	// If present, specifies the Amazon Web Services KMS Encryption Context to use for
	// object encryption. The value of this header is a base64-encoded UTF-8 string
	// holding JSON with the encryption context key-value pairs.
	SSEKMSEncryptionContext *string

	// If present, specifies the ID of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service
	// (Amazon Web Services KMS) symmetric customer managed key that was used for the
	// object.
	SSEKMSKeyId *string

	// The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in Amazon S3
	// (for example, AES256, aws:kms).
	ServerSideEncryption types.ServerSideEncryption

	// Version ID of the newly created copy.
	VersionId *string

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type CreateBucketInput

type CreateBucketInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket to create.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The canned ACL to apply to the bucket.
	ACL types.BucketCannedACL

	// The configuration information for the bucket.
	CreateBucketConfiguration *types.CreateBucketConfiguration

	// Allows grantee the read, write, read ACP, and write ACP permissions on the
	// bucket.
	GrantFullControl *string

	// Allows grantee to list the objects in the bucket.
	GrantRead *string

	// Allows grantee to read the bucket ACL.
	GrantReadACP *string

	// Allows grantee to create new objects in the bucket. For the bucket and object
	// owners of existing objects, also allows deletions and overwrites of those
	// objects.
	GrantWrite *string

	// Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable bucket.
	GrantWriteACP *string

	// Specifies whether you want S3 Object Lock to be enabled for the new bucket.
	ObjectLockEnabledForBucket bool

	// The container element for object ownership for a bucket's ownership controls.
	// BucketOwnerPreferred - Objects uploaded to the bucket change ownership to the
	// bucket owner if the objects are uploaded with the bucket-owner-full-control
	// canned ACL. ObjectWriter - The uploading account will own the object if the
	// object is uploaded with the bucket-owner-full-control canned ACL.
	// BucketOwnerEnforced - Access control lists (ACLs) are disabled and no longer
	// affect permissions. The bucket owner automatically owns and has full control
	// over every object in the bucket. The bucket only accepts PUT requests that don't
	// specify an ACL or bucket owner full control ACLs, such as the
	// bucket-owner-full-control canned ACL or an equivalent form of this ACL expressed
	// in the XML format.
	ObjectOwnership types.ObjectOwnership
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type CreateBucketOutput

type CreateBucketOutput struct {

	// A forward slash followed by the name of the bucket.
	Location *string

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type CreateMultipartUploadInput

type CreateMultipartUploadInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket to which to initiate the upload When using this action
	// with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The
	// access point hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts,
	// you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
	// hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using
	// this action with S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you
	// provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more
	// information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/S3onOutposts.html) in the
	// Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// Object key for which the multipart upload is to be initiated.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Key *string

	// The canned ACL to apply to the object. This action is not supported by Amazon S3
	// on Outposts.
	ACL types.ObjectCannedACL

	// Specifies whether Amazon S3 should use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption
	// with server-side encryption using AWS KMS (SSE-KMS). Setting this header to true
	// causes Amazon S3 to use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption with SSE-KMS.
	// Specifying this header with an object action doesn’t affect bucket-level
	// settings for S3 Bucket Key.
	BucketKeyEnabled bool

	// Specifies caching behavior along the request/reply chain.
	CacheControl *string

	// Indicates the algorithm you want Amazon S3 to use to create the checksum for the
	// object. For more information, see Checking object integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	ChecksumAlgorithm types.ChecksumAlgorithm

	// Specifies presentational information for the object.
	ContentDisposition *string

	// Specifies what content encodings have been applied to the object and thus what
	// decoding mechanisms must be applied to obtain the media-type referenced by the
	// Content-Type header field.
	ContentEncoding *string

	// The language the content is in.
	ContentLanguage *string

	// A standard MIME type describing the format of the object data.
	ContentType *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// The date and time at which the object is no longer cacheable.
	Expires *time.Time

	// Gives the grantee READ, READ_ACP, and WRITE_ACP permissions on the object. This
	// action is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
	GrantFullControl *string

	// Allows grantee to read the object data and its metadata. This action is not
	// supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
	GrantRead *string

	// Allows grantee to read the object ACL. This action is not supported by Amazon S3
	// on Outposts.
	GrantReadACP *string

	// Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable object. This action is not
	// supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts.
	GrantWriteACP *string

	// A map of metadata to store with the object in S3.
	Metadata map[string]string

	// Specifies whether you want to apply a legal hold to the uploaded object.
	ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus types.ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus

	// Specifies the Object Lock mode that you want to apply to the uploaded object.
	ObjectLockMode types.ObjectLockMode

	// Specifies the date and time when you want the Object Lock to expire.
	ObjectLockRetainUntilDate *time.Time

	// Confirms that the requester knows that they will be charged for the request.
	// Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests. For information
	// about downloading objects from Requester Pays buckets, see Downloading Objects
	// in Requester Pays Buckets
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ObjectsinRequesterPaysBuckets.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	RequestPayer types.RequestPayer

	// Specifies the algorithm to use to when encrypting the object (for example,
	// AES256).
	SSECustomerAlgorithm *string

	// Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in
	// encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is
	// discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be
	// appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the
	// x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm header.
	SSECustomerKey *string

	// Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321.
	// Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the
	// encryption key was transmitted without error.
	SSECustomerKeyMD5 *string

	// Specifies the Amazon Web Services KMS Encryption Context to use for object
	// encryption. The value of this header is a base64-encoded UTF-8 string holding
	// JSON with the encryption context key-value pairs.
	SSEKMSEncryptionContext *string

	// Specifies the ID of the symmetric customer managed key to use for object
	// encryption. All GET and PUT requests for an object protected by Amazon Web
	// Services KMS will fail if not made via SSL or using SigV4. For information about
	// configuring using any of the officially supported Amazon Web Services SDKs and
	// Amazon Web Services CLI, see Specifying the Signature Version in Request
	// Authentication
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/UsingAWSSDK.html#specify-signature-version)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	SSEKMSKeyId *string

	// The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in Amazon S3
	// (for example, AES256, aws:kms).
	ServerSideEncryption types.ServerSideEncryption

	// By default, Amazon S3 uses the STANDARD Storage Class to store newly created
	// objects. The STANDARD storage class provides high durability and high
	// availability. Depending on performance needs, you can specify a different
	// Storage Class. Amazon S3 on Outposts only uses the OUTPOSTS Storage Class. For
	// more information, see Storage Classes
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/storage-class-intro.html) in
	// the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	StorageClass types.StorageClass

	// The tag-set for the object. The tag-set must be encoded as URL Query parameters.
	Tagging *string

	// If the bucket is configured as a website, redirects requests for this object to
	// another object in the same bucket or to an external URL. Amazon S3 stores the
	// value of this header in the object metadata.
	WebsiteRedirectLocation *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type CreateMultipartUploadOutput

type CreateMultipartUploadOutput struct {

	// If the bucket has a lifecycle rule configured with an action to abort incomplete
	// multipart uploads and the prefix in the lifecycle rule matches the object name
	// in the request, the response includes this header. The header indicates when the
	// initiated multipart upload becomes eligible for an abort operation. For more
	// information, see  Aborting Incomplete Multipart Uploads Using a Bucket Lifecycle
	// Policy
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/mpuoverview.html#mpu-abort-incomplete-mpu-lifecycle-config).
	// The response also includes the x-amz-abort-rule-id header that provides the ID
	// of the lifecycle configuration rule that defines this action.
	AbortDate *time.Time

	// This header is returned along with the x-amz-abort-date header. It identifies
	// the applicable lifecycle configuration rule that defines the action to abort
	// incomplete multipart uploads.
	AbortRuleId *string

	// The name of the bucket to which the multipart upload was initiated. Does not
	// return the access point ARN or access point alias if used. When using this
	// action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point
	// hostname. The access point hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts,
	// you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
	// hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using
	// this action with S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you
	// provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more
	// information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/S3onOutposts.html) in the
	// Amazon S3 User Guide.
	Bucket *string

	// Indicates whether the multipart upload uses an S3 Bucket Key for server-side
	// encryption with Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS).
	BucketKeyEnabled bool

	// The algorithm that was used to create a checksum of the object.
	ChecksumAlgorithm types.ChecksumAlgorithm

	// Object key for which the multipart upload was initiated.
	Key *string

	// If present, indicates that the requester was successfully charged for the
	// request.
	RequestCharged types.RequestCharged

	// If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested,
	// the response will include this header confirming the encryption algorithm used.
	SSECustomerAlgorithm *string

	// If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested,
	// the response will include this header to provide round-trip message integrity
	// verification of the customer-provided encryption key.
	SSECustomerKeyMD5 *string

	// If present, specifies the Amazon Web Services KMS Encryption Context to use for
	// object encryption. The value of this header is a base64-encoded UTF-8 string
	// holding JSON with the encryption context key-value pairs.
	SSEKMSEncryptionContext *string

	// If present, specifies the ID of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service
	// (Amazon Web Services KMS) symmetric customer managed key that was used for the
	// object.
	SSEKMSKeyId *string

	// The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in Amazon S3
	// (for example, AES256, aws:kms).
	ServerSideEncryption types.ServerSideEncryption

	// ID for the initiated multipart upload.
	UploadId *string

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfigurationInput

type DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfigurationInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket from which an analytics configuration is deleted.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The ID that identifies the analytics configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Id *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfigurationOutput

type DeleteBucketAnalyticsConfigurationOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketCorsInput

type DeleteBucketCorsInput struct {

	// Specifies the bucket whose cors configuration is being deleted.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketCorsOutput

type DeleteBucketCorsOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketEncryptionInput

type DeleteBucketEncryptionInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket containing the server-side encryption configuration to
	// delete.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketEncryptionOutput

type DeleteBucketEncryptionOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketInput

type DeleteBucketInput struct {

	// Specifies the bucket being deleted.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationInput added in v0.31.0

type DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationInput struct {

	// The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose configuration you want to modify or
	// retrieve.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The ID used to identify the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Id *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationOutput added in v0.31.0

type DeleteBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketInventoryConfigurationInput

type DeleteBucketInventoryConfigurationInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket containing the inventory configuration to delete.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The ID used to identify the inventory configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Id *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketInventoryConfigurationOutput

type DeleteBucketInventoryConfigurationOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketLifecycleInput

type DeleteBucketLifecycleInput struct {

	// The bucket name of the lifecycle to delete.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketLifecycleOutput

type DeleteBucketLifecycleOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketMetricsConfigurationInput

type DeleteBucketMetricsConfigurationInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket containing the metrics configuration to delete.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The ID used to identify the metrics configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Id *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketMetricsConfigurationOutput

type DeleteBucketMetricsConfigurationOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketOutput

type DeleteBucketOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketOwnershipControlsInput added in v0.29.0

type DeleteBucketOwnershipControlsInput struct {

	// The Amazon S3 bucket whose OwnershipControls you want to delete.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketOwnershipControlsOutput added in v0.29.0

type DeleteBucketOwnershipControlsOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketPolicyInput

type DeleteBucketPolicyInput struct {

	// The bucket name.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketPolicyOutput

type DeleteBucketPolicyOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketReplicationInput

type DeleteBucketReplicationInput struct {

	// The bucket name.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketReplicationOutput

type DeleteBucketReplicationOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketTaggingInput

type DeleteBucketTaggingInput struct {

	// The bucket that has the tag set to be removed.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketTaggingOutput

type DeleteBucketTaggingOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketWebsiteInput

type DeleteBucketWebsiteInput struct {

	// The bucket name for which you want to remove the website configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteBucketWebsiteOutput

type DeleteBucketWebsiteOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteObjectInput

type DeleteObjectInput struct {

	// The bucket name of the bucket containing the object. When using this action with
	// an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The
	// access point hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts,
	// you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
	// hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using
	// this action with S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you
	// provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more
	// information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/S3onOutposts.html) in the
	// Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// Key name of the object to delete.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Key *string

	// Indicates whether S3 Object Lock should bypass Governance-mode restrictions to
	// process this operation. To use this header, you must have the
	// s3:BypassGovernanceRetention permission.
	BypassGovernanceRetention bool

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// The concatenation of the authentication device's serial number, a space, and the
	// value that is displayed on your authentication device. Required to permanently
	// delete a versioned object if versioning is configured with MFA delete enabled.
	MFA *string

	// Confirms that the requester knows that they will be charged for the request.
	// Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests. For information
	// about downloading objects from Requester Pays buckets, see Downloading Objects
	// in Requester Pays Buckets
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ObjectsinRequesterPaysBuckets.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	RequestPayer types.RequestPayer

	// VersionId used to reference a specific version of the object.
	VersionId *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteObjectOutput

type DeleteObjectOutput struct {

	// Specifies whether the versioned object that was permanently deleted was (true)
	// or was not (false) a delete marker.
	DeleteMarker bool

	// If present, indicates that the requester was successfully charged for the
	// request.
	RequestCharged types.RequestCharged

	// Returns the version ID of the delete marker created as a result of the DELETE
	// operation.
	VersionId *string

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteObjectTaggingInput

type DeleteObjectTaggingInput struct {

	// The bucket name containing the objects from which to remove the tags. When using
	// this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point
	// hostname. The access point hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts,
	// you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
	// hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using
	// this action with S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you
	// provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more
	// information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/S3onOutposts.html) in the
	// Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The key that identifies the object in the bucket from which to remove all tags.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Key *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// The versionId of the object that the tag-set will be removed from.
	VersionId *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteObjectTaggingOutput

type DeleteObjectTaggingOutput struct {

	// The versionId of the object the tag-set was removed from.
	VersionId *string

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteObjectsInput

type DeleteObjectsInput struct {

	// The bucket name containing the objects to delete. When using this action with an
	// access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access
	// point hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts,
	// you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
	// hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using
	// this action with S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you
	// provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more
	// information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/S3onOutposts.html) in the
	// Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// Container for the request.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Delete *types.Delete

	// Specifies whether you want to delete this object even if it has a
	// Governance-type Object Lock in place. To use this header, you must have the
	// s3:BypassGovernanceRetention permission.
	BypassGovernanceRetention bool

	// Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when using
	// the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if not using
	// the SDK. When sending this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum
	// or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the
	// HTTP status code 400 Bad Request. For more information, see Checking object
	// integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3
	// ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter. This checksum algorithm must
	// be the same for all parts and it match the checksum value supplied in the
	// CreateMultipartUpload request.
	ChecksumAlgorithm types.ChecksumAlgorithm

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// The concatenation of the authentication device's serial number, a space, and the
	// value that is displayed on your authentication device. Required to permanently
	// delete a versioned object if versioning is configured with MFA delete enabled.
	MFA *string

	// Confirms that the requester knows that they will be charged for the request.
	// Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests. For information
	// about downloading objects from Requester Pays buckets, see Downloading Objects
	// in Requester Pays Buckets
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ObjectsinRequesterPaysBuckets.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	RequestPayer types.RequestPayer
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeleteObjectsOutput

type DeleteObjectsOutput struct {

	// Container element for a successful delete. It identifies the object that was
	// successfully deleted.
	Deleted []types.DeletedObject

	// Container for a failed delete action that describes the object that Amazon S3
	// attempted to delete and the error it encountered.
	Errors []types.Error

	// If present, indicates that the requester was successfully charged for the
	// request.
	RequestCharged types.RequestCharged

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeletePublicAccessBlockInput

type DeletePublicAccessBlockInput struct {

	// The Amazon S3 bucket whose PublicAccessBlock configuration you want to delete.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type DeletePublicAccessBlockOutput

type DeletePublicAccessBlockOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type EndpointResolver

type EndpointResolver interface {
	ResolveEndpoint(region string, options EndpointResolverOptions) (aws.Endpoint, error)
}

EndpointResolver interface for resolving service endpoints.

func EndpointResolverFromURL added in v1.1.0

func EndpointResolverFromURL(url string, optFns ...func(*aws.Endpoint)) EndpointResolver

EndpointResolverFromURL returns an EndpointResolver configured using the provided endpoint url. By default, the resolved endpoint resolver uses the client region as signing region, and the endpoint source is set to EndpointSourceCustom.You can provide functional options to configure endpoint values for the resolved endpoint.

type EndpointResolverFunc

type EndpointResolverFunc func(region string, options EndpointResolverOptions) (aws.Endpoint, error)

EndpointResolverFunc is a helper utility that wraps a function so it satisfies the EndpointResolver interface. This is useful when you want to add additional endpoint resolving logic, or stub out specific endpoints with custom values.

func (EndpointResolverFunc) ResolveEndpoint

func (fn EndpointResolverFunc) ResolveEndpoint(region string, options EndpointResolverOptions) (endpoint aws.Endpoint, err error)

type EndpointResolverOptions added in v0.29.0

type EndpointResolverOptions = internalendpoints.Options

EndpointResolverOptions is the service endpoint resolver options

type GetBucketAccelerateConfigurationInput

type GetBucketAccelerateConfigurationInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket for which the accelerate configuration is retrieved.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketAccelerateConfigurationOutput

type GetBucketAccelerateConfigurationOutput struct {

	// The accelerate configuration of the bucket.
	Status types.BucketAccelerateStatus

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketAclInput

type GetBucketAclInput struct {

	// Specifies the S3 bucket whose ACL is being requested.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketAclOutput

type GetBucketAclOutput struct {

	// A list of grants.
	Grants []types.Grant

	// Container for the bucket owner's display name and ID.
	Owner *types.Owner

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketAnalyticsConfigurationInput

type GetBucketAnalyticsConfigurationInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket from which an analytics configuration is retrieved.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The ID that identifies the analytics configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Id *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketAnalyticsConfigurationOutput

type GetBucketAnalyticsConfigurationOutput struct {

	// The configuration and any analyses for the analytics filter.
	AnalyticsConfiguration *types.AnalyticsConfiguration

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketCorsInput

type GetBucketCorsInput struct {

	// The bucket name for which to get the cors configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketCorsOutput

type GetBucketCorsOutput struct {

	// A set of origins and methods (cross-origin access that you want to allow). You
	// can add up to 100 rules to the configuration.
	CORSRules []types.CORSRule

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketEncryptionInput

type GetBucketEncryptionInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket from which the server-side encryption configuration is
	// retrieved.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketEncryptionOutput

type GetBucketEncryptionOutput struct {

	// Specifies the default server-side-encryption configuration.
	ServerSideEncryptionConfiguration *types.ServerSideEncryptionConfiguration

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationInput added in v0.31.0

type GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationInput struct {

	// The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose configuration you want to modify or
	// retrieve.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The ID used to identify the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Id *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationOutput added in v0.31.0

type GetBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationOutput struct {

	// Container for S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration.
	IntelligentTieringConfiguration *types.IntelligentTieringConfiguration

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketInventoryConfigurationInput

type GetBucketInventoryConfigurationInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket containing the inventory configuration to retrieve.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The ID used to identify the inventory configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Id *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketInventoryConfigurationOutput

type GetBucketInventoryConfigurationOutput struct {

	// Specifies the inventory configuration.
	InventoryConfiguration *types.InventoryConfiguration

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketLifecycleConfigurationInput

type GetBucketLifecycleConfigurationInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket for which to get the lifecycle information.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketLifecycleConfigurationOutput

type GetBucketLifecycleConfigurationOutput struct {

	// Container for a lifecycle rule.
	Rules []types.LifecycleRule

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketLocationInput

type GetBucketLocationInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket for which to get the location.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketLocationOutput

type GetBucketLocationOutput struct {

	// Specifies the Region where the bucket resides. For a list of all the Amazon S3
	// supported location constraints by Region, see Regions and Endpoints
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/general/latest/gr/rande.html#s3_region). Buckets in
	// Region us-east-1 have a LocationConstraint of null.
	LocationConstraint types.BucketLocationConstraint

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketLoggingInput

type GetBucketLoggingInput struct {

	// The bucket name for which to get the logging information.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketLoggingOutput

type GetBucketLoggingOutput struct {

	// Describes where logs are stored and the prefix that Amazon S3 assigns to all log
	// object keys for a bucket. For more information, see PUT Bucket logging
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/RESTBucketPUTlogging.html) in
	// the Amazon S3 API Reference.
	LoggingEnabled *types.LoggingEnabled

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketMetricsConfigurationInput

type GetBucketMetricsConfigurationInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket containing the metrics configuration to retrieve.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The ID used to identify the metrics configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Id *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketMetricsConfigurationOutput

type GetBucketMetricsConfigurationOutput struct {

	// Specifies the metrics configuration.
	MetricsConfiguration *types.MetricsConfiguration

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketNotificationConfigurationInput

type GetBucketNotificationConfigurationInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket for which to get the notification configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketNotificationConfigurationOutput

type GetBucketNotificationConfigurationOutput struct {

	// Enables delivery of events to Amazon EventBridge.
	EventBridgeConfiguration *types.EventBridgeConfiguration

	// Describes the Lambda functions to invoke and the events for which to invoke
	// them.
	LambdaFunctionConfigurations []types.LambdaFunctionConfiguration

	// The Amazon Simple Queue Service queues to publish messages to and the events for
	// which to publish messages.
	QueueConfigurations []types.QueueConfiguration

	// The topic to which notifications are sent and the events for which notifications
	// are generated.
	TopicConfigurations []types.TopicConfiguration

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

A container for specifying the notification configuration of the bucket. If this element is empty, notifications are turned off for the bucket.

type GetBucketOwnershipControlsInput added in v0.29.0

type GetBucketOwnershipControlsInput struct {

	// The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose OwnershipControls you want to retrieve.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketOwnershipControlsOutput added in v0.29.0

type GetBucketOwnershipControlsOutput struct {

	// The OwnershipControls (BucketOwnerEnforced, BucketOwnerPreferred, or
	// ObjectWriter) currently in effect for this Amazon S3 bucket.
	OwnershipControls *types.OwnershipControls

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketPolicyInput

type GetBucketPolicyInput struct {

	// The bucket name for which to get the bucket policy.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketPolicyOutput

type GetBucketPolicyOutput struct {

	// The bucket policy as a JSON document.
	Policy *string

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketPolicyStatusInput

type GetBucketPolicyStatusInput struct {

	// The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose policy status you want to retrieve.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketPolicyStatusOutput

type GetBucketPolicyStatusOutput struct {

	// The policy status for the specified bucket.
	PolicyStatus *types.PolicyStatus

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketReplicationInput

type GetBucketReplicationInput struct {

	// The bucket name for which to get the replication information.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketReplicationOutput

type GetBucketReplicationOutput struct {

	// A container for replication rules. You can add up to 1,000 rules. The maximum
	// size of a replication configuration is 2 MB.
	ReplicationConfiguration *types.ReplicationConfiguration

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketRequestPaymentInput

type GetBucketRequestPaymentInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket for which to get the payment request configuration
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketRequestPaymentOutput

type GetBucketRequestPaymentOutput struct {

	// Specifies who pays for the download and request fees.
	Payer types.Payer

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketTaggingInput

type GetBucketTaggingInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket for which to get the tagging information.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketTaggingOutput

type GetBucketTaggingOutput struct {

	// Contains the tag set.
	//
	// This member is required.
	TagSet []types.Tag

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketVersioningInput

type GetBucketVersioningInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket for which to get the versioning information.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketVersioningOutput

type GetBucketVersioningOutput struct {

	// Specifies whether MFA delete is enabled in the bucket versioning configuration.
	// This element is only returned if the bucket has been configured with MFA delete.
	// If the bucket has never been so configured, this element is not returned.
	MFADelete types.MFADeleteStatus

	// The versioning state of the bucket.
	Status types.BucketVersioningStatus

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketWebsiteInput

type GetBucketWebsiteInput struct {

	// The bucket name for which to get the website configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetBucketWebsiteOutput

type GetBucketWebsiteOutput struct {

	// The object key name of the website error document to use for 4XX class errors.
	ErrorDocument *types.ErrorDocument

	// The name of the index document for the website (for example index.html).
	IndexDocument *types.IndexDocument

	// Specifies the redirect behavior of all requests to a website endpoint of an
	// Amazon S3 bucket.
	RedirectAllRequestsTo *types.RedirectAllRequestsTo

	// Rules that define when a redirect is applied and the redirect behavior.
	RoutingRules []types.RoutingRule

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetObjectAclInput

type GetObjectAclInput struct {

	// The bucket name that contains the object for which to get the ACL information.
	// When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the
	// access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The key of the object for which to get the ACL information.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Key *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// Confirms that the requester knows that they will be charged for the request.
	// Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests. For information
	// about downloading objects from Requester Pays buckets, see Downloading Objects
	// in Requester Pays Buckets
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ObjectsinRequesterPaysBuckets.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	RequestPayer types.RequestPayer

	// VersionId used to reference a specific version of the object.
	VersionId *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetObjectAclOutput

type GetObjectAclOutput struct {

	// A list of grants.
	Grants []types.Grant

	// Container for the bucket owner's display name and ID.
	Owner *types.Owner

	// If present, indicates that the requester was successfully charged for the
	// request.
	RequestCharged types.RequestCharged

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetObjectAttributesInput added in v1.25.0

type GetObjectAttributesInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket that contains the object. When using this action with an
	// access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access
	// point hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts,
	// you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
	// hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using
	// this action with S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you
	// provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more
	// information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/S3onOutposts.html) in the
	// Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The object key.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Key *string

	// An XML header that specifies the fields at the root level that you want returned
	// in the response. Fields that you do not specify are not returned.
	//
	// This member is required.
	ObjectAttributes []types.ObjectAttributes

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// Sets the maximum number of parts to return.
	MaxParts int32

	// Specifies the part after which listing should begin. Only parts with higher part
	// numbers will be listed.
	PartNumberMarker *string

	// Confirms that the requester knows that they will be charged for the request.
	// Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests. For information
	// about downloading objects from Requester Pays buckets, see Downloading Objects
	// in Requester Pays Buckets
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ObjectsinRequesterPaysBuckets.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	RequestPayer types.RequestPayer

	// Specifies the algorithm to use when encrypting the object (for example, AES256).
	SSECustomerAlgorithm *string

	// Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in
	// encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is
	// discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be
	// appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the
	// x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm header.
	SSECustomerKey *string

	// Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321.
	// Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the
	// encryption key was transmitted without error.
	SSECustomerKeyMD5 *string

	// The version ID used to reference a specific version of the object.
	VersionId *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetObjectAttributesOutput added in v1.25.0

type GetObjectAttributesOutput struct {

	// The checksum or digest of the object.
	Checksum *types.Checksum

	// Specifies whether the object retrieved was (true) or was not (false) a delete
	// marker. If false, this response header does not appear in the response.
	DeleteMarker bool

	// An ETag is an opaque identifier assigned by a web server to a specific version
	// of a resource found at a URL.
	ETag *string

	// The creation date of the object.
	LastModified *time.Time

	// A collection of parts associated with a multipart upload.
	ObjectParts *types.GetObjectAttributesParts

	// The size of the object in bytes.
	ObjectSize int64

	// If present, indicates that the requester was successfully charged for the
	// request.
	RequestCharged types.RequestCharged

	// Provides the storage class information of the object. Amazon S3 returns this
	// header for all objects except for S3 Standard storage class objects. For more
	// information, see Storage Classes
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/storage-class-intro.html).
	StorageClass types.StorageClass

	// The version ID of the object.
	VersionId *string

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetObjectInput

type GetObjectInput struct {

	// The bucket name containing the object. When using this action with an access
	// point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point
	// hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using an Object Lambda access point the
	// hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-object-lambda.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on
	// Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using
	// this action with S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you
	// provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more
	// information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/S3onOutposts.html) in the
	// Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// Key of the object to get.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Key *string

	// To retrieve the checksum, this mode must be enabled.
	ChecksumMode types.ChecksumMode

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// Return the object only if its entity tag (ETag) is the same as the one
	// specified; otherwise, return a 412 (precondition failed) error.
	IfMatch *string

	// Return the object only if it has been modified since the specified time;
	// otherwise, return a 304 (not modified) error.
	IfModifiedSince *time.Time

	// Return the object only if its entity tag (ETag) is different from the one
	// specified; otherwise, return a 304 (not modified) error.
	IfNoneMatch *string

	// Return the object only if it has not been modified since the specified time;
	// otherwise, return a 412 (precondition failed) error.
	IfUnmodifiedSince *time.Time

	// Part number of the object being read. This is a positive integer between 1 and
	// 10,000. Effectively performs a 'ranged' GET request for the part specified.
	// Useful for downloading just a part of an object.
	PartNumber int32

	// Downloads the specified range bytes of an object. For more information about the
	// HTTP Range header, see
	// https://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616-sec14.html#sec14.35
	// (https://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616-sec14.html#sec14.35). Amazon S3
	// doesn't support retrieving multiple ranges of data per GET request.
	Range *string

	// Confirms that the requester knows that they will be charged for the request.
	// Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests. For information
	// about downloading objects from Requester Pays buckets, see Downloading Objects
	// in Requester Pays Buckets
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ObjectsinRequesterPaysBuckets.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	RequestPayer types.RequestPayer

	// Sets the Cache-Control header of the response.
	ResponseCacheControl *string

	// Sets the Content-Disposition header of the response
	ResponseContentDisposition *string

	// Sets the Content-Encoding header of the response.
	ResponseContentEncoding *string

	// Sets the Content-Language header of the response.
	ResponseContentLanguage *string

	// Sets the Content-Type header of the response.
	ResponseContentType *string

	// Sets the Expires header of the response.
	ResponseExpires *time.Time

	// Specifies the algorithm to use to when decrypting the object (for example,
	// AES256).
	SSECustomerAlgorithm *string

	// Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 used to encrypt the
	// data. This value is used to decrypt the object when recovering it and must match
	// the one used when storing the data. The key must be appropriate for use with the
	// algorithm specified in the x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm
	// header.
	SSECustomerKey *string

	// Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321.
	// Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the
	// encryption key was transmitted without error.
	SSECustomerKeyMD5 *string

	// VersionId used to reference a specific version of the object.
	VersionId *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetObjectLegalHoldInput

type GetObjectLegalHoldInput struct {

	// The bucket name containing the object whose legal hold status you want to
	// retrieve. When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests
	// to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The key name for the object whose legal hold status you want to retrieve.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Key *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// Confirms that the requester knows that they will be charged for the request.
	// Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests. For information
	// about downloading objects from Requester Pays buckets, see Downloading Objects
	// in Requester Pays Buckets
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ObjectsinRequesterPaysBuckets.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	RequestPayer types.RequestPayer

	// The version ID of the object whose legal hold status you want to retrieve.
	VersionId *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetObjectLegalHoldOutput

type GetObjectLegalHoldOutput struct {

	// The current legal hold status for the specified object.
	LegalHold *types.ObjectLockLegalHold

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetObjectLockConfigurationInput

type GetObjectLockConfigurationInput struct {

	// The bucket whose Object Lock configuration you want to retrieve. When using this
	// action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point
	// hostname. The access point hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetObjectLockConfigurationOutput

type GetObjectLockConfigurationOutput struct {

	// The specified bucket's Object Lock configuration.
	ObjectLockConfiguration *types.ObjectLockConfiguration

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetObjectOutput

type GetObjectOutput struct {

	// Indicates that a range of bytes was specified.
	AcceptRanges *string

	// Object data.
	Body io.ReadCloser

	// Indicates whether the object uses an S3 Bucket Key for server-side encryption
	// with Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS).
	BucketKeyEnabled bool

	// Specifies caching behavior along the request/reply chain.
	CacheControl *string

	// The base64-encoded, 32-bit CRC32 checksum of the object. This will only be
	// present if it was uploaded with the object. With multipart uploads, this may not
	// be a checksum value of the object. For more information about how checksums are
	// calculated with multipart uploads, see  Checking object integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html#large-object-checksums)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	ChecksumCRC32 *string

	// The base64-encoded, 32-bit CRC32C checksum of the object. This will only be
	// present if it was uploaded with the object. With multipart uploads, this may not
	// be a checksum value of the object. For more information about how checksums are
	// calculated with multipart uploads, see  Checking object integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html#large-object-checksums)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	ChecksumCRC32C *string

	// The base64-encoded, 160-bit SHA-1 digest of the object. This will only be
	// present if it was uploaded with the object. With multipart uploads, this may not
	// be a checksum value of the object. For more information about how checksums are
	// calculated with multipart uploads, see  Checking object integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html#large-object-checksums)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	ChecksumSHA1 *string

	// The base64-encoded, 256-bit SHA-256 digest of the object. This will only be
	// present if it was uploaded with the object. With multipart uploads, this may not
	// be a checksum value of the object. For more information about how checksums are
	// calculated with multipart uploads, see  Checking object integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html#large-object-checksums)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	ChecksumSHA256 *string

	// Specifies presentational information for the object.
	ContentDisposition *string

	// Specifies what content encodings have been applied to the object and thus what
	// decoding mechanisms must be applied to obtain the media-type referenced by the
	// Content-Type header field.
	ContentEncoding *string

	// The language the content is in.
	ContentLanguage *string

	// Size of the body in bytes.
	ContentLength int64

	// The portion of the object returned in the response.
	ContentRange *string

	// A standard MIME type describing the format of the object data.
	ContentType *string

	// Specifies whether the object retrieved was (true) or was not (false) a Delete
	// Marker. If false, this response header does not appear in the response.
	DeleteMarker bool

	// An entity tag (ETag) is an opaque identifier assigned by a web server to a
	// specific version of a resource found at a URL.
	ETag *string

	// If the object expiration is configured (see PUT Bucket lifecycle), the response
	// includes this header. It includes the expiry-date and rule-id key-value pairs
	// providing object expiration information. The value of the rule-id is
	// URL-encoded.
	Expiration *string

	// The date and time at which the object is no longer cacheable.
	Expires *time.Time

	// Creation date of the object.
	LastModified *time.Time

	// A map of metadata to store with the object in S3.
	//
	// Map keys will be normalized to lower-case.
	Metadata map[string]string

	// This is set to the number of metadata entries not returned in x-amz-meta
	// headers. This can happen if you create metadata using an API like SOAP that
	// supports more flexible metadata than the REST API. For example, using SOAP, you
	// can create metadata whose values are not legal HTTP headers.
	MissingMeta int32

	// Indicates whether this object has an active legal hold. This field is only
	// returned if you have permission to view an object's legal hold status.
	ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus types.ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus

	// The Object Lock mode currently in place for this object.
	ObjectLockMode types.ObjectLockMode

	// The date and time when this object's Object Lock will expire.
	ObjectLockRetainUntilDate *time.Time

	// The count of parts this object has. This value is only returned if you specify
	// partNumber in your request and the object was uploaded as a multipart upload.
	PartsCount int32

	// Amazon S3 can return this if your request involves a bucket that is either a
	// source or destination in a replication rule.
	ReplicationStatus types.ReplicationStatus

	// If present, indicates that the requester was successfully charged for the
	// request.
	RequestCharged types.RequestCharged

	// Provides information about object restoration action and expiration time of the
	// restored object copy.
	Restore *string

	// If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested,
	// the response will include this header confirming the encryption algorithm used.
	SSECustomerAlgorithm *string

	// If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested,
	// the response will include this header to provide round-trip message integrity
	// verification of the customer-provided encryption key.
	SSECustomerKeyMD5 *string

	// If present, specifies the ID of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service
	// (Amazon Web Services KMS) symmetric customer managed key that was used for the
	// object.
	SSEKMSKeyId *string

	// The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in Amazon S3
	// (for example, AES256, aws:kms).
	ServerSideEncryption types.ServerSideEncryption

	// Provides storage class information of the object. Amazon S3 returns this header
	// for all objects except for S3 Standard storage class objects.
	StorageClass types.StorageClass

	// The number of tags, if any, on the object.
	TagCount int32

	// Version of the object.
	VersionId *string

	// If the bucket is configured as a website, redirects requests for this object to
	// another object in the same bucket or to an external URL. Amazon S3 stores the
	// value of this header in the object metadata.
	WebsiteRedirectLocation *string

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetObjectRetentionInput

type GetObjectRetentionInput struct {

	// The bucket name containing the object whose retention settings you want to
	// retrieve. When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests
	// to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The key name for the object whose retention settings you want to retrieve.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Key *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// Confirms that the requester knows that they will be charged for the request.
	// Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests. For information
	// about downloading objects from Requester Pays buckets, see Downloading Objects
	// in Requester Pays Buckets
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ObjectsinRequesterPaysBuckets.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	RequestPayer types.RequestPayer

	// The version ID for the object whose retention settings you want to retrieve.
	VersionId *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetObjectRetentionOutput

type GetObjectRetentionOutput struct {

	// The container element for an object's retention settings.
	Retention *types.ObjectLockRetention

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetObjectTaggingInput

type GetObjectTaggingInput struct {

	// The bucket name containing the object for which to get the tagging information.
	// When using this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the
	// access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts,
	// you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
	// hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using
	// this action with S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you
	// provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more
	// information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/S3onOutposts.html) in the
	// Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// Object key for which to get the tagging information.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Key *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// Confirms that the requester knows that they will be charged for the request.
	// Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests. For information
	// about downloading objects from Requester Pays buckets, see Downloading Objects
	// in Requester Pays Buckets
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ObjectsinRequesterPaysBuckets.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	RequestPayer types.RequestPayer

	// The versionId of the object for which to get the tagging information.
	VersionId *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetObjectTaggingOutput

type GetObjectTaggingOutput struct {

	// Contains the tag set.
	//
	// This member is required.
	TagSet []types.Tag

	// The versionId of the object for which you got the tagging information.
	VersionId *string

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetObjectTorrentInput

type GetObjectTorrentInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket containing the object for which to get the torrent files.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The object key for which to get the information.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Key *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// Confirms that the requester knows that they will be charged for the request.
	// Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests. For information
	// about downloading objects from Requester Pays buckets, see Downloading Objects
	// in Requester Pays Buckets
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ObjectsinRequesterPaysBuckets.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	RequestPayer types.RequestPayer
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetObjectTorrentOutput

type GetObjectTorrentOutput struct {

	// A Bencoded dictionary as defined by the BitTorrent specification
	Body io.ReadCloser

	// If present, indicates that the requester was successfully charged for the
	// request.
	RequestCharged types.RequestCharged

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetPublicAccessBlockInput

type GetPublicAccessBlockInput struct {

	// The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose PublicAccessBlock configuration you want
	// to retrieve.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type GetPublicAccessBlockOutput

type GetPublicAccessBlockOutput struct {

	// The PublicAccessBlock configuration currently in effect for this Amazon S3
	// bucket.
	PublicAccessBlockConfiguration *types.PublicAccessBlockConfiguration

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type HTTPClient

type HTTPClient interface {
	Do(*http.Request) (*http.Response, error)
}

type HTTPPresignerV4 added in v0.30.0

type HTTPPresignerV4 interface {
	PresignHTTP(
		ctx context.Context, credentials aws.Credentials, r *http.Request,
		payloadHash string, service string, region string, signingTime time.Time,
		optFns ...func(*v4.SignerOptions),
	) (url string, signedHeader http.Header, err error)
}

HTTPPresignerV4 represents presigner interface used by presign url client

type HTTPSignerV4

type HTTPSignerV4 interface {
	SignHTTP(ctx context.Context, credentials aws.Credentials, r *http.Request, payloadHash string, service string, region string, signingTime time.Time, optFns ...func(*v4.SignerOptions)) error
}

type HeadBucketAPIClient added in v0.31.0

type HeadBucketAPIClient interface {
	HeadBucket(context.Context, *HeadBucketInput, ...func(*Options)) (*HeadBucketOutput, error)
}

HeadBucketAPIClient is a client that implements the HeadBucket operation.

type HeadBucketInput

type HeadBucketInput struct {

	// The bucket name. When using this action with an access point, you must direct
	// requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts,
	// you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
	// hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using
	// this action with S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you
	// provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more
	// information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/S3onOutposts.html) in the
	// Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type HeadBucketOutput

type HeadBucketOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type HeadObjectAPIClient added in v0.31.0

type HeadObjectAPIClient interface {
	HeadObject(context.Context, *HeadObjectInput, ...func(*Options)) (*HeadObjectOutput, error)
}

HeadObjectAPIClient is a client that implements the HeadObject operation.

type HeadObjectInput

type HeadObjectInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket containing the object. When using this action with an
	// access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access
	// point hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts,
	// you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
	// hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using
	// this action with S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you
	// provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more
	// information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/S3onOutposts.html) in the
	// Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The object key.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Key *string

	// To retrieve the checksum, this parameter must be enabled. In addition, if you
	// enable ChecksumMode and the object is encrypted with Amazon Web Services Key
	// Management Service (Amazon Web Services KMS), you must have permission to use
	// the kms:Decrypt action for the request to succeed.
	ChecksumMode types.ChecksumMode

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// Return the object only if its entity tag (ETag) is the same as the one
	// specified; otherwise, return a 412 (precondition failed) error.
	IfMatch *string

	// Return the object only if it has been modified since the specified time;
	// otherwise, return a 304 (not modified) error.
	IfModifiedSince *time.Time

	// Return the object only if its entity tag (ETag) is different from the one
	// specified; otherwise, return a 304 (not modified) error.
	IfNoneMatch *string

	// Return the object only if it has not been modified since the specified time;
	// otherwise, return a 412 (precondition failed) error.
	IfUnmodifiedSince *time.Time

	// Part number of the object being read. This is a positive integer between 1 and
	// 10,000. Effectively performs a 'ranged' HEAD request for the part specified.
	// Useful querying about the size of the part and the number of parts in this
	// object.
	PartNumber int32

	// Because HeadObject returns only the metadata for an object, this parameter has
	// no effect.
	Range *string

	// Confirms that the requester knows that they will be charged for the request.
	// Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests. For information
	// about downloading objects from Requester Pays buckets, see Downloading Objects
	// in Requester Pays Buckets
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ObjectsinRequesterPaysBuckets.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	RequestPayer types.RequestPayer

	// Specifies the algorithm to use to when encrypting the object (for example,
	// AES256).
	SSECustomerAlgorithm *string

	// Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in
	// encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is
	// discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be
	// appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the
	// x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm header.
	SSECustomerKey *string

	// Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321.
	// Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the
	// encryption key was transmitted without error.
	SSECustomerKeyMD5 *string

	// VersionId used to reference a specific version of the object.
	VersionId *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type HeadObjectOutput

type HeadObjectOutput struct {

	// Indicates that a range of bytes was specified.
	AcceptRanges *string

	// The archive state of the head object.
	ArchiveStatus types.ArchiveStatus

	// Indicates whether the object uses an S3 Bucket Key for server-side encryption
	// with Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS).
	BucketKeyEnabled bool

	// Specifies caching behavior along the request/reply chain.
	CacheControl *string

	// The base64-encoded, 32-bit CRC32 checksum of the object. This will only be
	// present if it was uploaded with the object. With multipart uploads, this may not
	// be a checksum value of the object. For more information about how checksums are
	// calculated with multipart uploads, see  Checking object integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html#large-object-checksums)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	ChecksumCRC32 *string

	// The base64-encoded, 32-bit CRC32C checksum of the object. This will only be
	// present if it was uploaded with the object. With multipart uploads, this may not
	// be a checksum value of the object. For more information about how checksums are
	// calculated with multipart uploads, see  Checking object integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html#large-object-checksums)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	ChecksumCRC32C *string

	// The base64-encoded, 160-bit SHA-1 digest of the object. This will only be
	// present if it was uploaded with the object. With multipart uploads, this may not
	// be a checksum value of the object. For more information about how checksums are
	// calculated with multipart uploads, see  Checking object integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html#large-object-checksums)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	ChecksumSHA1 *string

	// The base64-encoded, 256-bit SHA-256 digest of the object. This will only be
	// present if it was uploaded with the object. With multipart uploads, this may not
	// be a checksum value of the object. For more information about how checksums are
	// calculated with multipart uploads, see  Checking object integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html#large-object-checksums)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	ChecksumSHA256 *string

	// Specifies presentational information for the object.
	ContentDisposition *string

	// Specifies what content encodings have been applied to the object and thus what
	// decoding mechanisms must be applied to obtain the media-type referenced by the
	// Content-Type header field.
	ContentEncoding *string

	// The language the content is in.
	ContentLanguage *string

	// Size of the body in bytes.
	ContentLength int64

	// A standard MIME type describing the format of the object data.
	ContentType *string

	// Specifies whether the object retrieved was (true) or was not (false) a Delete
	// Marker. If false, this response header does not appear in the response.
	DeleteMarker bool

	// An entity tag (ETag) is an opaque identifier assigned by a web server to a
	// specific version of a resource found at a URL.
	ETag *string

	// If the object expiration is configured (see PUT Bucket lifecycle), the response
	// includes this header. It includes the expiry-date and rule-id key-value pairs
	// providing object expiration information. The value of the rule-id is
	// URL-encoded.
	Expiration *string

	// The date and time at which the object is no longer cacheable.
	Expires *time.Time

	// Creation date of the object.
	LastModified *time.Time

	// A map of metadata to store with the object in S3.
	//
	// Map keys will be normalized to lower-case.
	Metadata map[string]string

	// This is set to the number of metadata entries not returned in x-amz-meta
	// headers. This can happen if you create metadata using an API like SOAP that
	// supports more flexible metadata than the REST API. For example, using SOAP, you
	// can create metadata whose values are not legal HTTP headers.
	MissingMeta int32

	// Specifies whether a legal hold is in effect for this object. This header is only
	// returned if the requester has the s3:GetObjectLegalHold permission. This header
	// is not returned if the specified version of this object has never had a legal
	// hold applied. For more information about S3 Object Lock, see Object Lock
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/object-lock.html).
	ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus types.ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus

	// The Object Lock mode, if any, that's in effect for this object. This header is
	// only returned if the requester has the s3:GetObjectRetention permission. For
	// more information about S3 Object Lock, see Object Lock
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/object-lock.html).
	ObjectLockMode types.ObjectLockMode

	// The date and time when the Object Lock retention period expires. This header is
	// only returned if the requester has the s3:GetObjectRetention permission.
	ObjectLockRetainUntilDate *time.Time

	// The count of parts this object has. This value is only returned if you specify
	// partNumber in your request and the object was uploaded as a multipart upload.
	PartsCount int32

	// Amazon S3 can return this header if your request involves a bucket that is
	// either a source or a destination in a replication rule. In replication, you have
	// a source bucket on which you configure replication and destination bucket or
	// buckets where Amazon S3 stores object replicas. When you request an object
	// (GetObject) or object metadata (HeadObject) from these buckets, Amazon S3 will
	// return the x-amz-replication-status header in the response as follows:
	//
	// * If
	// requesting an object from the source bucket, Amazon S3 will return the
	// x-amz-replication-status header if the object in your request is eligible for
	// replication. For example, suppose that in your replication configuration, you
	// specify object prefix TaxDocs requesting Amazon S3 to replicate objects with key
	// prefix TaxDocs. Any objects you upload with this key name prefix, for example
	// TaxDocs/document1.pdf, are eligible for replication. For any object request with
	// this key name prefix, Amazon S3 will return the x-amz-replication-status header
	// with value PENDING, COMPLETED or FAILED indicating object replication status.
	//
	// *
	// If requesting an object from a destination bucket, Amazon S3 will return the
	// x-amz-replication-status header with value REPLICA if the object in your request
	// is a replica that Amazon S3 created and there is no replica modification
	// replication in progress.
	//
	// * When replicating objects to multiple destination
	// buckets, the x-amz-replication-status header acts differently. The header of the
	// source object will only return a value of COMPLETED when replication is
	// successful to all destinations. The header will remain at value PENDING until
	// replication has completed for all destinations. If one or more destinations
	// fails replication the header will return FAILED.
	//
	// For more information, see
	// Replication
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/NotificationHowTo.html).
	ReplicationStatus types.ReplicationStatus

	// If present, indicates that the requester was successfully charged for the
	// request.
	RequestCharged types.RequestCharged

	// If the object is an archived object (an object whose storage class is GLACIER),
	// the response includes this header if either the archive restoration is in
	// progress (see RestoreObject
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/API/API_RestoreObject.html) or an
	// archive copy is already restored. If an archive copy is already restored, the
	// header value indicates when Amazon S3 is scheduled to delete the object copy.
	// For example: x-amz-restore: ongoing-request="false", expiry-date="Fri, 21 Dec
	// 2012 00:00:00 GMT" If the object restoration is in progress, the header returns
	// the value ongoing-request="true". For more information about archiving objects,
	// see Transitioning Objects: General Considerations
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/object-lifecycle-mgmt.html#lifecycle-transition-general-considerations).
	Restore *string

	// If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested,
	// the response will include this header confirming the encryption algorithm used.
	SSECustomerAlgorithm *string

	// If server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was requested,
	// the response will include this header to provide round-trip message integrity
	// verification of the customer-provided encryption key.
	SSECustomerKeyMD5 *string

	// If present, specifies the ID of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service
	// (Amazon Web Services KMS) symmetric customer managed key that was used for the
	// object.
	SSEKMSKeyId *string

	// If the object is stored using server-side encryption either with an Amazon Web
	// Services KMS key or an Amazon S3-managed encryption key, the response includes
	// this header with the value of the server-side encryption algorithm used when
	// storing this object in Amazon S3 (for example, AES256, aws:kms).
	ServerSideEncryption types.ServerSideEncryption

	// Provides storage class information of the object. Amazon S3 returns this header
	// for all objects except for S3 Standard storage class objects. For more
	// information, see Storage Classes
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/storage-class-intro.html).
	StorageClass types.StorageClass

	// Version of the object.
	VersionId *string

	// If the bucket is configured as a website, redirects requests for this object to
	// another object in the same bucket or to an external URL. Amazon S3 stores the
	// value of this header in the object metadata.
	WebsiteRedirectLocation *string

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurationsInput

type ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurationsInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket from which analytics configurations are retrieved.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The ContinuationToken that represents a placeholder from where this request
	// should begin.
	ContinuationToken *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurationsOutput

type ListBucketAnalyticsConfigurationsOutput struct {

	// The list of analytics configurations for a bucket.
	AnalyticsConfigurationList []types.AnalyticsConfiguration

	// The marker that is used as a starting point for this analytics configuration
	// list response. This value is present if it was sent in the request.
	ContinuationToken *string

	// Indicates whether the returned list of analytics configurations is complete. A
	// value of true indicates that the list is not complete and the
	// NextContinuationToken will be provided for a subsequent request.
	IsTruncated bool

	// NextContinuationToken is sent when isTruncated is true, which indicates that
	// there are more analytics configurations to list. The next request must include
	// this NextContinuationToken. The token is obfuscated and is not a usable value.
	NextContinuationToken *string

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationsInput added in v0.31.0

type ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationsInput struct {

	// The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose configuration you want to modify or
	// retrieve.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The ContinuationToken that represents a placeholder from where this request
	// should begin.
	ContinuationToken *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationsOutput added in v0.31.0

type ListBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationsOutput struct {

	// The ContinuationToken that represents a placeholder from where this request
	// should begin.
	ContinuationToken *string

	// The list of S3 Intelligent-Tiering configurations for a bucket.
	IntelligentTieringConfigurationList []types.IntelligentTieringConfiguration

	// Indicates whether the returned list of analytics configurations is complete. A
	// value of true indicates that the list is not complete and the
	// NextContinuationToken will be provided for a subsequent request.
	IsTruncated bool

	// The marker used to continue this inventory configuration listing. Use the
	// NextContinuationToken from this response to continue the listing in a subsequent
	// request. The continuation token is an opaque value that Amazon S3 understands.
	NextContinuationToken *string

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListBucketInventoryConfigurationsInput

type ListBucketInventoryConfigurationsInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket containing the inventory configurations to retrieve.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The marker used to continue an inventory configuration listing that has been
	// truncated. Use the NextContinuationToken from a previously truncated list
	// response to continue the listing. The continuation token is an opaque value that
	// Amazon S3 understands.
	ContinuationToken *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListBucketInventoryConfigurationsOutput

type ListBucketInventoryConfigurationsOutput struct {

	// If sent in the request, the marker that is used as a starting point for this
	// inventory configuration list response.
	ContinuationToken *string

	// The list of inventory configurations for a bucket.
	InventoryConfigurationList []types.InventoryConfiguration

	// Tells whether the returned list of inventory configurations is complete. A value
	// of true indicates that the list is not complete and the NextContinuationToken is
	// provided for a subsequent request.
	IsTruncated bool

	// The marker used to continue this inventory configuration listing. Use the
	// NextContinuationToken from this response to continue the listing in a subsequent
	// request. The continuation token is an opaque value that Amazon S3 understands.
	NextContinuationToken *string

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListBucketMetricsConfigurationsInput

type ListBucketMetricsConfigurationsInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket containing the metrics configurations to retrieve.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The marker that is used to continue a metrics configuration listing that has
	// been truncated. Use the NextContinuationToken from a previously truncated list
	// response to continue the listing. The continuation token is an opaque value that
	// Amazon S3 understands.
	ContinuationToken *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListBucketMetricsConfigurationsOutput

type ListBucketMetricsConfigurationsOutput struct {

	// The marker that is used as a starting point for this metrics configuration list
	// response. This value is present if it was sent in the request.
	ContinuationToken *string

	// Indicates whether the returned list of metrics configurations is complete. A
	// value of true indicates that the list is not complete and the
	// NextContinuationToken will be provided for a subsequent request.
	IsTruncated bool

	// The list of metrics configurations for a bucket.
	MetricsConfigurationList []types.MetricsConfiguration

	// The marker used to continue a metrics configuration listing that has been
	// truncated. Use the NextContinuationToken from a previously truncated list
	// response to continue the listing. The continuation token is an opaque value that
	// Amazon S3 understands.
	NextContinuationToken *string

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListBucketsInput

type ListBucketsInput struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListBucketsOutput

type ListBucketsOutput struct {

	// The list of buckets owned by the requester.
	Buckets []types.Bucket

	// The owner of the buckets listed.
	Owner *types.Owner

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListMultipartUploadsInput

type ListMultipartUploadsInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket to which the multipart upload was initiated. When using
	// this action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point
	// hostname. The access point hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts,
	// you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
	// hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using
	// this action with S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you
	// provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more
	// information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/S3onOutposts.html) in the
	// Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// Character you use to group keys. All keys that contain the same string between
	// the prefix, if specified, and the first occurrence of the delimiter after the
	// prefix are grouped under a single result element, CommonPrefixes. If you don't
	// specify the prefix parameter, then the substring starts at the beginning of the
	// key. The keys that are grouped under CommonPrefixes result element are not
	// returned elsewhere in the response.
	Delimiter *string

	// Requests Amazon S3 to encode the object keys in the response and specifies the
	// encoding method to use. An object key may contain any Unicode character;
	// however, XML 1.0 parser cannot parse some characters, such as characters with an
	// ASCII value from 0 to 10. For characters that are not supported in XML 1.0, you
	// can add this parameter to request that Amazon S3 encode the keys in the
	// response.
	EncodingType types.EncodingType

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// Together with upload-id-marker, this parameter specifies the multipart upload
	// after which listing should begin. If upload-id-marker is not specified, only the
	// keys lexicographically greater than the specified key-marker will be included in
	// the list. If upload-id-marker is specified, any multipart uploads for a key
	// equal to the key-marker might also be included, provided those multipart uploads
	// have upload IDs lexicographically greater than the specified upload-id-marker.
	KeyMarker *string

	// Sets the maximum number of multipart uploads, from 1 to 1,000, to return in the
	// response body. 1,000 is the maximum number of uploads that can be returned in a
	// response.
	MaxUploads int32

	// Lists in-progress uploads only for those keys that begin with the specified
	// prefix. You can use prefixes to separate a bucket into different grouping of
	// keys. (You can think of using prefix to make groups in the same way you'd use a
	// folder in a file system.)
	Prefix *string

	// Together with key-marker, specifies the multipart upload after which listing
	// should begin. If key-marker is not specified, the upload-id-marker parameter is
	// ignored. Otherwise, any multipart uploads for a key equal to the key-marker
	// might be included in the list only if they have an upload ID lexicographically
	// greater than the specified upload-id-marker.
	UploadIdMarker *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListMultipartUploadsOutput

type ListMultipartUploadsOutput struct {

	// The name of the bucket to which the multipart upload was initiated. Does not
	// return the access point ARN or access point alias if used.
	Bucket *string

	// If you specify a delimiter in the request, then the result returns each distinct
	// key prefix containing the delimiter in a CommonPrefixes element. The distinct
	// key prefixes are returned in the Prefix child element.
	CommonPrefixes []types.CommonPrefix

	// Contains the delimiter you specified in the request. If you don't specify a
	// delimiter in your request, this element is absent from the response.
	Delimiter *string

	// Encoding type used by Amazon S3 to encode object keys in the response. If you
	// specify encoding-type request parameter, Amazon S3 includes this element in the
	// response, and returns encoded key name values in the following response
	// elements: Delimiter, KeyMarker, Prefix, NextKeyMarker, Key.
	EncodingType types.EncodingType

	// Indicates whether the returned list of multipart uploads is truncated. A value
	// of true indicates that the list was truncated. The list can be truncated if the
	// number of multipart uploads exceeds the limit allowed or specified by max
	// uploads.
	IsTruncated bool

	// The key at or after which the listing began.
	KeyMarker *string

	// Maximum number of multipart uploads that could have been included in the
	// response.
	MaxUploads int32

	// When a list is truncated, this element specifies the value that should be used
	// for the key-marker request parameter in a subsequent request.
	NextKeyMarker *string

	// When a list is truncated, this element specifies the value that should be used
	// for the upload-id-marker request parameter in a subsequent request.
	NextUploadIdMarker *string

	// When a prefix is provided in the request, this field contains the specified
	// prefix. The result contains only keys starting with the specified prefix.
	Prefix *string

	// Upload ID after which listing began.
	UploadIdMarker *string

	// Container for elements related to a particular multipart upload. A response can
	// contain zero or more Upload elements.
	Uploads []types.MultipartUpload

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListObjectVersionsInput

type ListObjectVersionsInput struct {

	// The bucket name that contains the objects.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// A delimiter is a character that you specify to group keys. All keys that contain
	// the same string between the prefix and the first occurrence of the delimiter are
	// grouped under a single result element in CommonPrefixes. These groups are
	// counted as one result against the max-keys limitation. These keys are not
	// returned elsewhere in the response.
	Delimiter *string

	// Requests Amazon S3 to encode the object keys in the response and specifies the
	// encoding method to use. An object key may contain any Unicode character;
	// however, XML 1.0 parser cannot parse some characters, such as characters with an
	// ASCII value from 0 to 10. For characters that are not supported in XML 1.0, you
	// can add this parameter to request that Amazon S3 encode the keys in the
	// response.
	EncodingType types.EncodingType

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// Specifies the key to start with when listing objects in a bucket.
	KeyMarker *string

	// Sets the maximum number of keys returned in the response. By default the action
	// returns up to 1,000 key names. The response might contain fewer keys but will
	// never contain more. If additional keys satisfy the search criteria, but were not
	// returned because max-keys was exceeded, the response contains true. To return
	// the additional keys, see key-marker and version-id-marker.
	MaxKeys int32

	// Use this parameter to select only those keys that begin with the specified
	// prefix. You can use prefixes to separate a bucket into different groupings of
	// keys. (You can think of using prefix to make groups in the same way you'd use a
	// folder in a file system.) You can use prefix with delimiter to roll up numerous
	// objects into a single result under CommonPrefixes.
	Prefix *string

	// Specifies the object version you want to start listing from.
	VersionIdMarker *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListObjectVersionsOutput

type ListObjectVersionsOutput struct {

	// All of the keys rolled up into a common prefix count as a single return when
	// calculating the number of returns.
	CommonPrefixes []types.CommonPrefix

	// Container for an object that is a delete marker.
	DeleteMarkers []types.DeleteMarkerEntry

	// The delimiter grouping the included keys. A delimiter is a character that you
	// specify to group keys. All keys that contain the same string between the prefix
	// and the first occurrence of the delimiter are grouped under a single result
	// element in CommonPrefixes. These groups are counted as one result against the
	// max-keys limitation. These keys are not returned elsewhere in the response.
	Delimiter *string

	// Encoding type used by Amazon S3 to encode object key names in the XML response.
	// If you specify encoding-type request parameter, Amazon S3 includes this element
	// in the response, and returns encoded key name values in the following response
	// elements: KeyMarker, NextKeyMarker, Prefix, Key, and Delimiter.
	EncodingType types.EncodingType

	// A flag that indicates whether Amazon S3 returned all of the results that
	// satisfied the search criteria. If your results were truncated, you can make a
	// follow-up paginated request using the NextKeyMarker and NextVersionIdMarker
	// response parameters as a starting place in another request to return the rest of
	// the results.
	IsTruncated bool

	// Marks the last key returned in a truncated response.
	KeyMarker *string

	// Specifies the maximum number of objects to return.
	MaxKeys int32

	// The bucket name.
	Name *string

	// When the number of responses exceeds the value of MaxKeys, NextKeyMarker
	// specifies the first key not returned that satisfies the search criteria. Use
	// this value for the key-marker request parameter in a subsequent request.
	NextKeyMarker *string

	// When the number of responses exceeds the value of MaxKeys, NextVersionIdMarker
	// specifies the first object version not returned that satisfies the search
	// criteria. Use this value for the version-id-marker request parameter in a
	// subsequent request.
	NextVersionIdMarker *string

	// Selects objects that start with the value supplied by this parameter.
	Prefix *string

	// Marks the last version of the key returned in a truncated response.
	VersionIdMarker *string

	// Container for version information.
	Versions []types.ObjectVersion

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListObjectsInput

type ListObjectsInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket containing the objects. When using this action with an
	// access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access
	// point hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts,
	// you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
	// hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using
	// this action with S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you
	// provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more
	// information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/S3onOutposts.html) in the
	// Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// A delimiter is a character you use to group keys.
	Delimiter *string

	// Requests Amazon S3 to encode the object keys in the response and specifies the
	// encoding method to use. An object key may contain any Unicode character;
	// however, XML 1.0 parser cannot parse some characters, such as characters with an
	// ASCII value from 0 to 10. For characters that are not supported in XML 1.0, you
	// can add this parameter to request that Amazon S3 encode the keys in the
	// response.
	EncodingType types.EncodingType

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// Marker is where you want Amazon S3 to start listing from. Amazon S3 starts
	// listing after this specified key. Marker can be any key in the bucket.
	Marker *string

	// Sets the maximum number of keys returned in the response. By default the action
	// returns up to 1,000 key names. The response might contain fewer keys but will
	// never contain more.
	MaxKeys int32

	// Limits the response to keys that begin with the specified prefix.
	Prefix *string

	// Confirms that the requester knows that she or he will be charged for the list
	// objects request. Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their
	// requests.
	RequestPayer types.RequestPayer
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListObjectsOutput

type ListObjectsOutput struct {

	// All of the keys (up to 1,000) rolled up in a common prefix count as a single
	// return when calculating the number of returns. A response can contain
	// CommonPrefixes only if you specify a delimiter. CommonPrefixes contains all (if
	// there are any) keys between Prefix and the next occurrence of the string
	// specified by the delimiter. CommonPrefixes lists keys that act like
	// subdirectories in the directory specified by Prefix. For example, if the prefix
	// is notes/ and the delimiter is a slash (/) as in notes/summer/july, the common
	// prefix is notes/summer/. All of the keys that roll up into a common prefix count
	// as a single return when calculating the number of returns.
	CommonPrefixes []types.CommonPrefix

	// Metadata about each object returned.
	Contents []types.Object

	// Causes keys that contain the same string between the prefix and the first
	// occurrence of the delimiter to be rolled up into a single result element in the
	// CommonPrefixes collection. These rolled-up keys are not returned elsewhere in
	// the response. Each rolled-up result counts as only one return against the
	// MaxKeys value.
	Delimiter *string

	// Encoding type used by Amazon S3 to encode object keys in the response.
	EncodingType types.EncodingType

	// A flag that indicates whether Amazon S3 returned all of the results that
	// satisfied the search criteria.
	IsTruncated bool

	// Indicates where in the bucket listing begins. Marker is included in the response
	// if it was sent with the request.
	Marker *string

	// The maximum number of keys returned in the response body.
	MaxKeys int32

	// The bucket name.
	Name *string

	// When response is truncated (the IsTruncated element value in the response is
	// true), you can use the key name in this field as marker in the subsequent
	// request to get next set of objects. Amazon S3 lists objects in alphabetical
	// order Note: This element is returned only if you have delimiter request
	// parameter specified. If response does not include the NextMarker and it is
	// truncated, you can use the value of the last Key in the response as the marker
	// in the subsequent request to get the next set of object keys.
	NextMarker *string

	// Keys that begin with the indicated prefix.
	Prefix *string

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListObjectsV2APIClient added in v0.30.0

type ListObjectsV2APIClient interface {
	ListObjectsV2(context.Context, *ListObjectsV2Input, ...func(*Options)) (*ListObjectsV2Output, error)
}

ListObjectsV2APIClient is a client that implements the ListObjectsV2 operation.

type ListObjectsV2Input

type ListObjectsV2Input struct {

	// Bucket name to list. When using this action with an access point, you must
	// direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes
	// the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When
	// using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you
	// provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information
	// about access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts,
	// you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
	// hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using
	// this action with S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you
	// provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more
	// information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/S3onOutposts.html) in the
	// Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// ContinuationToken indicates Amazon S3 that the list is being continued on this
	// bucket with a token. ContinuationToken is obfuscated and is not a real key.
	ContinuationToken *string

	// A delimiter is a character you use to group keys.
	Delimiter *string

	// Encoding type used by Amazon S3 to encode object keys in the response.
	EncodingType types.EncodingType

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// The owner field is not present in listV2 by default, if you want to return owner
	// field with each key in the result then set the fetch owner field to true.
	FetchOwner bool

	// Sets the maximum number of keys returned in the response. By default the action
	// returns up to 1,000 key names. The response might contain fewer keys but will
	// never contain more.
	MaxKeys int32

	// Limits the response to keys that begin with the specified prefix.
	Prefix *string

	// Confirms that the requester knows that she or he will be charged for the list
	// objects request in V2 style. Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in
	// their requests.
	RequestPayer types.RequestPayer

	// StartAfter is where you want Amazon S3 to start listing from. Amazon S3 starts
	// listing after this specified key. StartAfter can be any key in the bucket.
	StartAfter *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListObjectsV2Output

type ListObjectsV2Output struct {

	// All of the keys (up to 1,000) rolled up into a common prefix count as a single
	// return when calculating the number of returns. A response can contain
	// CommonPrefixes only if you specify a delimiter. CommonPrefixes contains all (if
	// there are any) keys between Prefix and the next occurrence of the string
	// specified by a delimiter. CommonPrefixes lists keys that act like subdirectories
	// in the directory specified by Prefix. For example, if the prefix is notes/ and
	// the delimiter is a slash (/) as in notes/summer/july, the common prefix is
	// notes/summer/. All of the keys that roll up into a common prefix count as a
	// single return when calculating the number of returns.
	CommonPrefixes []types.CommonPrefix

	// Metadata about each object returned.
	Contents []types.Object

	// If ContinuationToken was sent with the request, it is included in the response.
	ContinuationToken *string

	// Causes keys that contain the same string between the prefix and the first
	// occurrence of the delimiter to be rolled up into a single result element in the
	// CommonPrefixes collection. These rolled-up keys are not returned elsewhere in
	// the response. Each rolled-up result counts as only one return against the
	// MaxKeys value.
	Delimiter *string

	// Encoding type used by Amazon S3 to encode object key names in the XML response.
	// If you specify the encoding-type request parameter, Amazon S3 includes this
	// element in the response, and returns encoded key name values in the following
	// response elements: Delimiter, Prefix, Key, and StartAfter.
	EncodingType types.EncodingType

	// Set to false if all of the results were returned. Set to true if more keys are
	// available to return. If the number of results exceeds that specified by MaxKeys,
	// all of the results might not be returned.
	IsTruncated bool

	// KeyCount is the number of keys returned with this request. KeyCount will always
	// be less than or equals to MaxKeys field. Say you ask for 50 keys, your result
	// will include less than equals 50 keys
	KeyCount int32

	// Sets the maximum number of keys returned in the response. By default the action
	// returns up to 1,000 key names. The response might contain fewer keys but will
	// never contain more.
	MaxKeys int32

	// The bucket name. When using this action with an access point, you must direct
	// requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts,
	// you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
	// hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using
	// this action with S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you
	// provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more
	// information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/S3onOutposts.html) in the
	// Amazon S3 User Guide.
	Name *string

	// NextContinuationToken is sent when isTruncated is true, which means there are
	// more keys in the bucket that can be listed. The next list requests to Amazon S3
	// can be continued with this NextContinuationToken. NextContinuationToken is
	// obfuscated and is not a real key
	NextContinuationToken *string

	// Keys that begin with the indicated prefix.
	Prefix *string

	// If StartAfter was sent with the request, it is included in the response.
	StartAfter *string

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListObjectsV2Paginator added in v0.30.0

type ListObjectsV2Paginator struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ListObjectsV2Paginator is a paginator for ListObjectsV2

func NewListObjectsV2Paginator added in v0.30.0

func NewListObjectsV2Paginator(client ListObjectsV2APIClient, params *ListObjectsV2Input, optFns ...func(*ListObjectsV2PaginatorOptions)) *ListObjectsV2Paginator

NewListObjectsV2Paginator returns a new ListObjectsV2Paginator

func (*ListObjectsV2Paginator) HasMorePages added in v0.30.0

func (p *ListObjectsV2Paginator) HasMorePages() bool

HasMorePages returns a boolean indicating whether more pages are available

func (*ListObjectsV2Paginator) NextPage added in v0.30.0

func (p *ListObjectsV2Paginator) NextPage(ctx context.Context, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*ListObjectsV2Output, error)

NextPage retrieves the next ListObjectsV2 page.

type ListObjectsV2PaginatorOptions added in v0.30.0

type ListObjectsV2PaginatorOptions struct {
	// Sets the maximum number of keys returned in the response. By default the action
	// returns up to 1,000 key names. The response might contain fewer keys but will
	// never contain more.
	Limit int32

	// Set to true if pagination should stop if the service returns a pagination token
	// that matches the most recent token provided to the service.
	StopOnDuplicateToken bool
}

ListObjectsV2PaginatorOptions is the paginator options for ListObjectsV2

type ListPartsAPIClient added in v0.31.0

type ListPartsAPIClient interface {
	ListParts(context.Context, *ListPartsInput, ...func(*Options)) (*ListPartsOutput, error)
}

ListPartsAPIClient is a client that implements the ListParts operation.

type ListPartsInput

type ListPartsInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket to which the parts are being uploaded. When using this
	// action with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point
	// hostname. The access point hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this
	// action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide
	// the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about
	// access point ARNs, see Using access points
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/using-access-points.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When using this action with Amazon S3 on Outposts,
	// you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
	// hostname takes the form
	// AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using
	// this action with S3 on Outposts through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you
	// provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more
	// information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/S3onOutposts.html) in the
	// Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// Object key for which the multipart upload was initiated.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Key *string

	// Upload ID identifying the multipart upload whose parts are being listed.
	//
	// This member is required.
	UploadId *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// Sets the maximum number of parts to return.
	MaxParts int32

	// Specifies the part after which listing should begin. Only parts with higher part
	// numbers will be listed.
	PartNumberMarker *string

	// Confirms that the requester knows that they will be charged for the request.
	// Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests. For information
	// about downloading objects from Requester Pays buckets, see Downloading Objects
	// in Requester Pays Buckets
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ObjectsinRequesterPaysBuckets.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	RequestPayer types.RequestPayer

	// The server-side encryption (SSE) algorithm used to encrypt the object. This
	// parameter is needed only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm.
	// For more information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ServerSideEncryptionCustomerKeys.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	SSECustomerAlgorithm *string

	// The server-side encryption (SSE) customer managed key. This parameter is needed
	// only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm. For more
	// information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ServerSideEncryptionCustomerKeys.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	SSECustomerKey *string

	// The MD5 server-side encryption (SSE) customer managed key. This parameter is
	// needed only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm. For more
	// information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/ServerSideEncryptionCustomerKeys.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
	SSECustomerKeyMD5 *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListPartsOutput

type ListPartsOutput struct {

	// If the bucket has a lifecycle rule configured with an action to abort incomplete
	// multipart uploads and the prefix in the lifecycle rule matches the object name
	// in the request, then the response includes this header indicating when the
	// initiated multipart upload will become eligible for abort operation. For more
	// information, see Aborting Incomplete Multipart Uploads Using a Bucket Lifecycle
	// Policy
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/mpuoverview.html#mpu-abort-incomplete-mpu-lifecycle-config).
	// The response will also include the x-amz-abort-rule-id header that will provide
	// the ID of the lifecycle configuration rule that defines this action.
	AbortDate *time.Time

	// This header is returned along with the x-amz-abort-date header. It identifies
	// applicable lifecycle configuration rule that defines the action to abort
	// incomplete multipart uploads.
	AbortRuleId *string

	// The name of the bucket to which the multipart upload was initiated. Does not
	// return the access point ARN or access point alias if used.
	Bucket *string

	// The algorithm that was used to create a checksum of the object.
	ChecksumAlgorithm types.ChecksumAlgorithm

	// Container element that identifies who initiated the multipart upload. If the
	// initiator is an Amazon Web Services account, this element provides the same
	// information as the Owner element. If the initiator is an IAM User, this element
	// provides the user ARN and display name.
	Initiator *types.Initiator

	// Indicates whether the returned list of parts is truncated. A true value
	// indicates that the list was truncated. A list can be truncated if the number of
	// parts exceeds the limit returned in the MaxParts element.
	IsTruncated bool

	// Object key for which the multipart upload was initiated.
	Key *string

	// Maximum number of parts that were allowed in the response.
	MaxParts int32

	// When a list is truncated, this element specifies the last part in the list, as
	// well as the value to use for the part-number-marker request parameter in a
	// subsequent request.
	NextPartNumberMarker *string

	// Container element that identifies the object owner, after the object is created.
	// If multipart upload is initiated by an IAM user, this element provides the
	// parent account ID and display name.
	Owner *types.Owner

	// When a list is truncated, this element specifies the last part in the list, as
	// well as the value to use for the part-number-marker request parameter in a
	// subsequent request.
	PartNumberMarker *string

	// Container for elements related to a particular part. A response can contain zero
	// or more Part elements.
	Parts []types.Part

	// If present, indicates that the requester was successfully charged for the
	// request.
	RequestCharged types.RequestCharged

	// Class of storage (STANDARD or REDUCED_REDUNDANCY) used to store the uploaded
	// object.
	StorageClass types.StorageClass

	// Upload ID identifying the multipart upload whose parts are being listed.
	UploadId *string

	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type ListPartsPaginator added in v0.31.0

type ListPartsPaginator struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ListPartsPaginator is a paginator for ListParts

func NewListPartsPaginator added in v0.31.0

func NewListPartsPaginator(client ListPartsAPIClient, params *ListPartsInput, optFns ...func(*ListPartsPaginatorOptions)) *ListPartsPaginator

NewListPartsPaginator returns a new ListPartsPaginator

func (*ListPartsPaginator) HasMorePages added in v0.31.0

func (p *ListPartsPaginator) HasMorePages() bool

HasMorePages returns a boolean indicating whether more pages are available

func (*ListPartsPaginator) NextPage added in v0.31.0

func (p *ListPartsPaginator) NextPage(ctx context.Context, optFns ...func(*Options)) (*ListPartsOutput, error)

NextPage retrieves the next ListParts page.

type ListPartsPaginatorOptions added in v0.31.0

type ListPartsPaginatorOptions struct {
	// Sets the maximum number of parts to return.
	Limit int32

	// Set to true if pagination should stop if the service returns a pagination token
	// that matches the most recent token provided to the service.
	StopOnDuplicateToken bool
}

ListPartsPaginatorOptions is the paginator options for ListParts

type ObjectExistsWaiter added in v0.31.0

type ObjectExistsWaiter struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ObjectExistsWaiter defines the waiters for ObjectExists

func NewObjectExistsWaiter added in v0.31.0

func NewObjectExistsWaiter(client HeadObjectAPIClient, optFns ...func(*ObjectExistsWaiterOptions)) *ObjectExistsWaiter

NewObjectExistsWaiter constructs a ObjectExistsWaiter.

func (*ObjectExistsWaiter) Wait added in v0.31.0

func (w *ObjectExistsWaiter) Wait(ctx context.Context, params *HeadObjectInput, maxWaitDur time.Duration, optFns ...func(*ObjectExistsWaiterOptions)) error

Wait calls the waiter function for ObjectExists waiter. The maxWaitDur is the maximum wait duration the waiter will wait. The maxWaitDur is required and must be greater than zero.

func (*ObjectExistsWaiter) WaitForOutput added in v1.19.0

func (w *ObjectExistsWaiter) WaitForOutput(ctx context.Context, params *HeadObjectInput, maxWaitDur time.Duration, optFns ...func(*ObjectExistsWaiterOptions)) (*HeadObjectOutput, error)

WaitForOutput calls the waiter function for ObjectExists waiter and returns the output of the successful operation. The maxWaitDur is the maximum wait duration the waiter will wait. The maxWaitDur is required and must be greater than zero.

type ObjectExistsWaiterOptions added in v0.31.0

type ObjectExistsWaiterOptions struct {

	// Set of options to modify how an operation is invoked. These apply to all
	// operations invoked for this client. Use functional options on operation call to
	// modify this list for per operation behavior.
	APIOptions []func(*middleware.Stack) error

	// MinDelay is the minimum amount of time to delay between retries. If unset,
	// ObjectExistsWaiter will use default minimum delay of 5 seconds. Note that
	// MinDelay must resolve to a value lesser than or equal to the MaxDelay.
	MinDelay time.Duration

	// MaxDelay is the maximum amount of time to delay between retries. If unset or set
	// to zero, ObjectExistsWaiter will use default max delay of 120 seconds. Note that
	// MaxDelay must resolve to value greater than or equal to the MinDelay.
	MaxDelay time.Duration

	// LogWaitAttempts is used to enable logging for waiter retry attempts
	LogWaitAttempts bool

	// Retryable is function that can be used to override the service defined
	// waiter-behavior based on operation output, or returned error. This function is
	// used by the waiter to decide if a state is retryable or a terminal state. By
	// default service-modeled logic will populate this option. This option can thus be
	// used to define a custom waiter state with fall-back to service-modeled waiter
	// state mutators.The function returns an error in case of a failure state. In case
	// of retry state, this function returns a bool value of true and nil error, while
	// in case of success it returns a bool value of false and nil error.
	Retryable func(context.Context, *HeadObjectInput, *HeadObjectOutput, error) (bool, error)
}

ObjectExistsWaiterOptions are waiter options for ObjectExistsWaiter

type ObjectNotExistsWaiter added in v1.0.0

type ObjectNotExistsWaiter struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ObjectNotExistsWaiter defines the waiters for ObjectNotExists

func NewObjectNotExistsWaiter added in v1.0.0

func NewObjectNotExistsWaiter(client HeadObjectAPIClient, optFns ...func(*ObjectNotExistsWaiterOptions)) *ObjectNotExistsWaiter

NewObjectNotExistsWaiter constructs a ObjectNotExistsWaiter.

func (*ObjectNotExistsWaiter) Wait added in v1.0.0

func (w *ObjectNotExistsWaiter) Wait(ctx context.Context, params *HeadObjectInput, maxWaitDur time.Duration, optFns ...func(*ObjectNotExistsWaiterOptions)) error

Wait calls the waiter function for ObjectNotExists waiter. The maxWaitDur is the maximum wait duration the waiter will wait. The maxWaitDur is required and must be greater than zero.

func (*ObjectNotExistsWaiter) WaitForOutput added in v1.19.0

func (w *ObjectNotExistsWaiter) WaitForOutput(ctx context.Context, params *HeadObjectInput, maxWaitDur time.Duration, optFns ...func(*ObjectNotExistsWaiterOptions)) (*HeadObjectOutput, error)

WaitForOutput calls the waiter function for ObjectNotExists waiter and returns the output of the successful operation. The maxWaitDur is the maximum wait duration the waiter will wait. The maxWaitDur is required and must be greater than zero.

type ObjectNotExistsWaiterOptions added in v1.0.0

type ObjectNotExistsWaiterOptions struct {

	// Set of options to modify how an operation is invoked. These apply to all
	// operations invoked for this client. Use functional options on operation call to
	// modify this list for per operation behavior.
	APIOptions []func(*middleware.Stack) error

	// MinDelay is the minimum amount of time to delay between retries. If unset,
	// ObjectNotExistsWaiter will use default minimum delay of 5 seconds. Note that
	// MinDelay must resolve to a value lesser than or equal to the MaxDelay.
	MinDelay time.Duration

	// MaxDelay is the maximum amount of time to delay between retries. If unset or set
	// to zero, ObjectNotExistsWaiter will use default max delay of 120 seconds. Note
	// that MaxDelay must resolve to value greater than or equal to the MinDelay.
	MaxDelay time.Duration

	// LogWaitAttempts is used to enable logging for waiter retry attempts
	LogWaitAttempts bool

	// Retryable is function that can be used to override the service defined
	// waiter-behavior based on operation output, or returned error. This function is
	// used by the waiter to decide if a state is retryable or a terminal state. By
	// default service-modeled logic will populate this option. This option can thus be
	// used to define a custom waiter state with fall-back to service-modeled waiter
	// state mutators.The function returns an error in case of a failure state. In case
	// of retry state, this function returns a bool value of true and nil error, while
	// in case of success it returns a bool value of false and nil error.
	Retryable func(context.Context, *HeadObjectInput, *HeadObjectOutput, error) (bool, error)
}

ObjectNotExistsWaiterOptions are waiter options for ObjectNotExistsWaiter

type Options

type Options struct {
	// Set of options to modify how an operation is invoked. These apply to all
	// operations invoked for this client. Use functional options on operation call to
	// modify this list for per operation behavior.
	APIOptions []func(*middleware.Stack) error

	// Configures the events that will be sent to the configured logger.
	ClientLogMode aws.ClientLogMode

	// The credentials object to use when signing requests.
	Credentials aws.CredentialsProvider

	// The configuration DefaultsMode that the SDK should use when constructing the
	// clients initial default settings.
	DefaultsMode aws.DefaultsMode

	// Allows you to disable S3 Multi-Region access points feature.
	DisableMultiRegionAccessPoints bool

	// The endpoint options to be used when attempting to resolve an endpoint.
	EndpointOptions EndpointResolverOptions

	// The service endpoint resolver.
	EndpointResolver EndpointResolver

	// Signature Version 4 (SigV4) Signer
	HTTPSignerV4 HTTPSignerV4

	// The logger writer interface to write logging messages to.
	Logger logging.Logger

	// The region to send requests to. (Required)
	Region string

	// RetryMaxAttempts specifies the maximum number attempts an API client will call
	// an operation that fails with a retryable error. A value of 0 is ignored, and
	// will not be used to configure the API client created default retryer, or modify
	// per operation call's retry max attempts. When creating a new API Clients this
	// member will only be used if the Retryer Options member is nil. This value will
	// be ignored if Retryer is not nil. If specified in an operation call's functional
	// options with a value that is different than the constructed client's Options,
	// the Client's Retryer will be wrapped to use the operation's specific
	// RetryMaxAttempts value.
	RetryMaxAttempts int

	// RetryMode specifies the retry mode the API client will be created with, if
	// Retryer option is not also specified. When creating a new API Clients this
	// member will only be used if the Retryer Options member is nil. This value will
	// be ignored if Retryer is not nil. Currently does not support per operation call
	// overrides, may in the future.
	RetryMode aws.RetryMode

	// Retryer guides how HTTP requests should be retried in case of recoverable
	// failures. When nil the API client will use a default retryer. The kind of
	// default retry created by the API client can be changed with the RetryMode
	// option.
	Retryer aws.Retryer

	// The RuntimeEnvironment configuration, only populated if the DefaultsMode is set
	// to DefaultsModeAuto and is initialized using config.LoadDefaultConfig. You
	// should not populate this structure programmatically, or rely on the values here
	// within your applications.
	RuntimeEnvironment aws.RuntimeEnvironment

	// Allows you to enable arn region support for the service.
	UseARNRegion bool

	// Allows you to enable S3 Accelerate feature. All operations compatible with S3
	// Accelerate will use the accelerate endpoint for requests. Requests not
	// compatible will fall back to normal S3 requests. The bucket must be enabled for
	// accelerate to be used with S3 client with accelerate enabled. If the bucket is
	// not enabled for accelerate an error will be returned. The bucket name must be
	// DNS compatible to work with accelerate.
	UseAccelerate bool

	// Allows you to enable dual-stack endpoint support for the service.
	//
	// Deprecated: Set dual-stack by setting UseDualStackEndpoint on
	// EndpointResolverOptions. When EndpointResolverOptions' UseDualStackEndpoint
	// field is set it overrides this field value.
	UseDualstack bool

	// Allows you to enable the client to use path-style addressing, i.e.,
	// https://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY. By default, the S3 client will use virtual
	// hosted bucket addressing when possible(https://BUCKET.s3.amazonaws.com/KEY).
	UsePathStyle bool

	// The HTTP client to invoke API calls with. Defaults to client's default HTTP
	// implementation if nil.
	HTTPClient HTTPClient
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

func (Options) Copy

func (o Options) Copy() Options

Copy creates a clone where the APIOptions list is deep copied.

type PresignClient added in v0.30.0

type PresignClient struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

PresignClient represents the presign url client

func NewPresignClient added in v0.30.0

func NewPresignClient(c *Client, optFns ...func(*PresignOptions)) *PresignClient

NewPresignClient generates a presign client using provided API Client and presign options

func (*PresignClient) PresignGetObject added in v0.30.0

func (c *PresignClient) PresignGetObject(ctx context.Context, params *GetObjectInput, optFns ...func(*PresignOptions)) (*v4.PresignedHTTPRequest, error)

PresignGetObject is used to generate a presigned HTTP Request which contains presigned URL, signed headers and HTTP method used.

func (*PresignClient) PresignHeadObject added in v1.12.0

func (c *PresignClient) PresignHeadObject(ctx context.Context, params *HeadObjectInput, optFns ...func(*PresignOptions)) (*v4.PresignedHTTPRequest, error)

PresignHeadObject is used to generate a presigned HTTP Request which contains presigned URL, signed headers and HTTP method used.

func (*PresignClient) PresignPutObject added in v0.30.0

func (c *PresignClient) PresignPutObject(ctx context.Context, params *PutObjectInput, optFns ...func(*PresignOptions)) (*v4.PresignedHTTPRequest, error)

PresignPutObject is used to generate a presigned HTTP Request which contains presigned URL, signed headers and HTTP method used.

func (*PresignClient) PresignUploadPart added in v1.7.0

func (c *PresignClient) PresignUploadPart(ctx context.Context, params *UploadPartInput, optFns ...func(*PresignOptions)) (*v4.PresignedHTTPRequest, error)

PresignUploadPart is used to generate a presigned HTTP Request which contains presigned URL, signed headers and HTTP method used.

type PresignOptions added in v0.30.0

type PresignOptions struct {

	// ClientOptions are list of functional options to mutate client options used by
	// the presign client.
	ClientOptions []func(*Options)

	// Presigner is the presigner used by the presign url client
	Presigner HTTPPresignerV4

	// Expires sets the expiration duration for the generated presign url. This should
	// be the duration in seconds the presigned URL should be considered valid for. If
	// not set or set to zero, presign url would default to expire after 900 seconds.
	Expires time.Duration
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

PresignOptions represents the presign client options

type PutBucketAccelerateConfigurationInput

type PutBucketAccelerateConfigurationInput struct {

	// Container for setting the transfer acceleration state.
	//
	// This member is required.
	AccelerateConfiguration *types.AccelerateConfiguration

	// The name of the bucket for which the accelerate configuration is set.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when using
	// the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if not using
	// the SDK. When sending this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum
	// or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the
	// HTTP status code 400 Bad Request. For more information, see Checking object
	// integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3
	// ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.
	ChecksumAlgorithm types.ChecksumAlgorithm

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketAccelerateConfigurationOutput

type PutBucketAccelerateConfigurationOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketAclInput

type PutBucketAclInput struct {

	// The bucket to which to apply the ACL.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The canned ACL to apply to the bucket.
	ACL types.BucketCannedACL

	// Contains the elements that set the ACL permissions for an object per grantee.
	AccessControlPolicy *types.AccessControlPolicy

	// Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when using
	// the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if not using
	// the SDK. When sending this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum
	// or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the
	// HTTP status code 400 Bad Request. For more information, see Checking object
	// integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3
	// ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.
	ChecksumAlgorithm types.ChecksumAlgorithm

	// The base64-encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the data. This header must be used as a
	// message integrity check to verify that the request body was not corrupted in
	// transit. For more information, go to RFC 1864.
	// (http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1864.txt) For requests made using the Amazon Web
	// Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is
	// calculated automatically.
	ContentMD5 *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// Allows grantee the read, write, read ACP, and write ACP permissions on the
	// bucket.
	GrantFullControl *string

	// Allows grantee to list the objects in the bucket.
	GrantRead *string

	// Allows grantee to read the bucket ACL.
	GrantReadACP *string

	// Allows grantee to create new objects in the bucket. For the bucket and object
	// owners of existing objects, also allows deletions and overwrites of those
	// objects.
	GrantWrite *string

	// Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable bucket.
	GrantWriteACP *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketAclOutput

type PutBucketAclOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketAnalyticsConfigurationInput

type PutBucketAnalyticsConfigurationInput struct {

	// The configuration and any analyses for the analytics filter.
	//
	// This member is required.
	AnalyticsConfiguration *types.AnalyticsConfiguration

	// The name of the bucket to which an analytics configuration is stored.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The ID that identifies the analytics configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Id *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketAnalyticsConfigurationOutput

type PutBucketAnalyticsConfigurationOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketCorsInput

type PutBucketCorsInput struct {

	// Specifies the bucket impacted by the corsconfiguration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// Describes the cross-origin access configuration for objects in an Amazon S3
	// bucket. For more information, see Enabling Cross-Origin Resource Sharing
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/cors.html) in the Amazon S3
	// User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	CORSConfiguration *types.CORSConfiguration

	// Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when using
	// the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if not using
	// the SDK. When sending this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum
	// or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the
	// HTTP status code 400 Bad Request. For more information, see Checking object
	// integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3
	// ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.
	ChecksumAlgorithm types.ChecksumAlgorithm

	// The base64-encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the data. This header must be used as a
	// message integrity check to verify that the request body was not corrupted in
	// transit. For more information, go to RFC 1864.
	// (http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1864.txt) For requests made using the Amazon Web
	// Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is
	// calculated automatically.
	ContentMD5 *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketCorsOutput

type PutBucketCorsOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketEncryptionInput

type PutBucketEncryptionInput struct {

	// Specifies default encryption for a bucket using server-side encryption with
	// Amazon S3-managed keys (SSE-S3) or customer managed keys (SSE-KMS). For
	// information about the Amazon S3 default encryption feature, see Amazon S3
	// Default Bucket Encryption
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/bucket-encryption.html) in the
	// Amazon S3 User Guide.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// Specifies the default server-side-encryption configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	ServerSideEncryptionConfiguration *types.ServerSideEncryptionConfiguration

	// Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when using
	// the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if not using
	// the SDK. When sending this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum
	// or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the
	// HTTP status code 400 Bad Request. For more information, see Checking object
	// integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3
	// ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.
	ChecksumAlgorithm types.ChecksumAlgorithm

	// The base64-encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the server-side encryption
	// configuration. For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line
	// Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated
	// automatically.
	ContentMD5 *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketEncryptionOutput

type PutBucketEncryptionOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationInput added in v0.31.0

type PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationInput struct {

	// The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose configuration you want to modify or
	// retrieve.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The ID used to identify the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Id *string

	// Container for S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	IntelligentTieringConfiguration *types.IntelligentTieringConfiguration
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationOutput added in v0.31.0

type PutBucketIntelligentTieringConfigurationOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketInventoryConfigurationInput

type PutBucketInventoryConfigurationInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket where the inventory configuration will be stored.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The ID used to identify the inventory configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Id *string

	// Specifies the inventory configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	InventoryConfiguration *types.InventoryConfiguration

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketInventoryConfigurationOutput

type PutBucketInventoryConfigurationOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketLifecycleConfigurationInput

type PutBucketLifecycleConfigurationInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket for which to set the configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when using
	// the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if not using
	// the SDK. When sending this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum
	// or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the
	// HTTP status code 400 Bad Request. For more information, see Checking object
	// integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3
	// ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.
	ChecksumAlgorithm types.ChecksumAlgorithm

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// Container for lifecycle rules. You can add as many as 1,000 rules.
	LifecycleConfiguration *types.BucketLifecycleConfiguration
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketLifecycleConfigurationOutput

type PutBucketLifecycleConfigurationOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketLoggingInput

type PutBucketLoggingInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket for which to set the logging parameters.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// Container for logging status information.
	//
	// This member is required.
	BucketLoggingStatus *types.BucketLoggingStatus

	// Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when using
	// the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if not using
	// the SDK. When sending this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum
	// or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the
	// HTTP status code 400 Bad Request. For more information, see Checking object
	// integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3
	// ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.
	ChecksumAlgorithm types.ChecksumAlgorithm

	// The MD5 hash of the PutBucketLogging request body. For requests made using the
	// Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs,
	// this field is calculated automatically.
	ContentMD5 *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketLoggingOutput

type PutBucketLoggingOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketMetricsConfigurationInput

type PutBucketMetricsConfigurationInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket for which the metrics configuration is set.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The ID used to identify the metrics configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Id *string

	// Specifies the metrics configuration.
	//
	// This member is required.
	MetricsConfiguration *types.MetricsConfiguration

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketMetricsConfigurationOutput

type PutBucketMetricsConfigurationOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketNotificationConfigurationInput

type PutBucketNotificationConfigurationInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// A container for specifying the notification configuration of the bucket. If this
	// element is empty, notifications are turned off for the bucket.
	//
	// This member is required.
	NotificationConfiguration *types.NotificationConfiguration

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string

	// Skips validation of Amazon SQS, Amazon SNS, and Lambda destinations. True or
	// false value.
	SkipDestinationValidation bool
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketNotificationConfigurationOutput

type PutBucketNotificationConfigurationOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketOwnershipControlsInput added in v0.29.0

type PutBucketOwnershipControlsInput struct {

	// The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose OwnershipControls you want to set.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The OwnershipControls (BucketOwnerEnforced, BucketOwnerPreferred, or
	// ObjectWriter) that you want to apply to this Amazon S3 bucket.
	//
	// This member is required.
	OwnershipControls *types.OwnershipControls

	// The MD5 hash of the OwnershipControls request body. For requests made using the
	// Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs,
	// this field is calculated automatically.
	ContentMD5 *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketOwnershipControlsOutput added in v0.29.0

type PutBucketOwnershipControlsOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata middleware.Metadata
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketPolicyInput

type PutBucketPolicyInput struct {

	// The name of the bucket.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Bucket *string

	// The bucket policy as a JSON document.
	//
	// This member is required.
	Policy *string

	// Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when using
	// the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if not using
	// the SDK. When sending this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum
	// or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the
	// HTTP status code 400 Bad Request. For more information, see Checking object
	// integrity
	// (https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/checking-object-integrity.html)
	// in the Amazon S3 User Guide. If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3
	// ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.
	ChecksumAlgorithm types.ChecksumAlgorithm

	// Set this parameter to true to confirm that you want to remove your permissions
	// to change this bucket policy in the future.
	ConfirmRemoveSelfBucketAccess bool

	// The MD5 hash of the request body. For requests made using the Amazon Web
	// Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is
	// calculated automatically.
	ContentMD5 *string

	// The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
	// different account, the request fails with the HTTP status code 403 Forbidden
	// (access denied).
	ExpectedBucketOwner *string
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

type PutBucketPolicyOutput

type PutBucketPolicyOutput struct {
	// Metadata pertaining to the operation's result.
	ResultMetadata